From 7e0f021a9aec35fd8e6725e87e3313b101d26f5e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tobias Klauser Date: Sun, 27 Jan 2008 11:37:44 +0100 Subject: Initial import (2.0.2-6) --- reference/C/MAN/Makefile.am | 5 + reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in | 410 +++++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/abs.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/access.htm | 166 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/acos.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/alarm.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/asctime.htm | 233 +++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/asin.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/assert.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/atan.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/atan2.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/calloc.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ceil.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/chdir.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/chown.htm | 93 +++++ reference/C/MAN/chroot.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/clock.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/close.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/closedir.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/cos.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/cosh.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ctermid.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/cuserid.htm | 27 ++ reference/C/MAN/difftime.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/div.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/dup.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/dup2.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/exp.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/fabs.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/feof.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ferror.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/fflush.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/fgetpos.htm | 163 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/fgetpwent.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/floor.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/fmod.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/fopen.htm | 164 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/fpathconf.htm | 166 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/fputs.htm | 167 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/fread.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/freopen.htm | 164 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/frexp.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/fscanf.htm | 365 +++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/fseek.htm | 163 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/fwrite.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getc.htm | 169 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/getdid.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getenv.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getgroupd.htm | 163 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/gethostname.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getlogin.htm | 27 ++ reference/C/MAN/getopt.htm | 291 +++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/getpgrp.htm | 166 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/getpid.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getpw.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getpwent.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/getpwnam.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/gets.htm | 169 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/getuid.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/index.htm | 103 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ioctl.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/isatty.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/labs.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ldexp.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ldiv.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/link.htm | 167 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/longjmp.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/lseek.htm | 165 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/mblen.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/mbstowcs.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/mbtowc.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/memchr.htm | 103 +++++ reference/C/MAN/memcmp.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/memcpy.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/memmove.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/memset.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/mkdir.htm | 172 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/modf.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/opendir.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/pause.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/perlembed.htm | 885 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/perror.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/printf.htm | 362 ++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/putenv.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/putpwent.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/puts.htm | 167 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/raise.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/rand.htm | 166 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/readdir.htm | 164 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/realloc.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/remove.htm | 169 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/rename.htm | 231 +++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/rewinddir.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/rmdir.htm | 166 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/scandir.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/scanf.htm | 365 +++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/seekdir.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/setbuf.htm | 167 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/setegid.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/setenv.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/seteuid.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/setgid.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/setjmp.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/setlocale.htm | 168 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/setpgid.htm | 166 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/setsid.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/setuid.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/signal.htm | 104 +++++ reference/C/MAN/sin.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/sinh.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/sleep.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/sprintf.htm | 362 ++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/sqrt.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/stat.htm | 232 +++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/stderr.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strcasecmp.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strcat.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strcoll.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strcspn.htm | 103 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strftime.htm | 233 +++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/strlen.htm | 97 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strpbrk.htm | 103 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strspn.htm | 103 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strstr.htm | 103 +++++ reference/C/MAN/strtod.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/sysconf.htm | 233 +++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/tan.htm | 102 +++++ reference/C/MAN/tanh.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/telldir.htm | 101 +++++ reference/C/MAN/test | 4 + reference/C/MAN/time.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/tmpfile.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/tmpnam.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/togetpgrp.htm | 492 ++++++++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/toupper.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ttyname.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/uname.htm | 99 +++++ reference/C/MAN/ungetc.htm | 169 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/unlink.htm | 168 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/unsetenv.htm | 98 +++++ reference/C/MAN/va_start.htm | 159 ++++++++ reference/C/MAN/vfprintf.htm | 362 ++++++++++++++++ reference/C/MAN/wcstombs.htm | 100 +++++ reference/C/MAN/wctomb.htm | 100 +++++ 144 files changed, 19346 insertions(+) create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/Makefile.am create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/abs.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/access.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/acos.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/alarm.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/asctime.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/asin.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/assert.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/atan.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/atan2.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/calloc.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ceil.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/chdir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/chown.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/chroot.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/clock.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/close.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/closedir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/cos.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/cosh.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ctermid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/cuserid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/difftime.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/div.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/dup.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/dup2.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/exp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fabs.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/feof.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ferror.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fflush.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fgetpos.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fgetpwent.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/floor.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fmod.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fopen.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fpathconf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fputs.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fread.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/freopen.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/frexp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fscanf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fseek.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/fwrite.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getc.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getdid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getenv.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getgroupd.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/gethostname.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getlogin.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getopt.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getpgrp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getpid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getpw.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getpwent.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getpwnam.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/gets.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/getuid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/index.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ioctl.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/isatty.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/labs.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ldexp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ldiv.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/link.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/longjmp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/lseek.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/mblen.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/mbstowcs.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/mbtowc.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/memchr.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/memcmp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/memcpy.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/memmove.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/memset.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/mkdir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/modf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/opendir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/pause.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/perlembed.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/perror.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/printf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/putenv.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/putpwent.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/puts.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/raise.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/rand.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/readdir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/realloc.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/remove.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/rename.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/rewinddir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/rmdir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/scandir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/scanf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/seekdir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setbuf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setegid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setenv.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/seteuid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setgid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setjmp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setlocale.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setpgid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setsid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/setuid.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/signal.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/sin.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/sinh.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/sleep.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/sprintf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/sqrt.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/stat.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/stderr.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strcasecmp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strcat.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strcoll.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strcspn.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strftime.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strlen.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strpbrk.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strspn.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strstr.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/strtod.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/sysconf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/tan.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/tanh.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/telldir.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/test create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/time.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/tmpfile.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/tmpnam.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/togetpgrp.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/toupper.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ttyname.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/uname.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/ungetc.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/unlink.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/unsetenv.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/va_start.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/vfprintf.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/wcstombs.htm create mode 100644 reference/C/MAN/wctomb.htm (limited to 'reference/C/MAN') diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/Makefile.am b/reference/C/MAN/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..28d46b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +EXTRA_DIST = $(wildcard *.html) $(wildcard *.htm) $(wildcard *.gif) +docs_DATA = $(EXTRA_DIST) + +docsdir = $(kde_htmldir)/en/kdevelop/$(subdir) + diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in b/reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..25161e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,410 @@ +# KDE tags expanded automatically by am_edit - $Revision: 1.2 $ +# Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.5 from Makefile.am. + +# Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 +# Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +SHELL = @SHELL@ + +srcdir = @srcdir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ + +bindir = @bindir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +libdir = @libdir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +oldincludedir = /usr/include +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +top_builddir = ../../.. + +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ + +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = @program_transform_name@ +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_triplet = @build@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_triplet = @host@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +target_triplet = @target@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +ARTSCCONFIG = @ARTSCCONFIG@ +AS = @AS@ +AUTODIRS = @AUTODIRS@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CONF_FILES = @CONF_FILES@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CXX = @CXX@ +CXXCPP = @CXXCPP@ +DCOPIDL = @DCOPIDL@ +DCOPIDL2CPP = @DCOPIDL2CPP@ +DCOP_DEPENDENCIES = @DCOP_DEPENDENCIES@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DPMSINC = @DPMSINC@ +DPMSLIB = @DPMSLIB@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +GCJ = @GCJ@ +GCJFLAGS = @GCJFLAGS@ +GLINC = @GLINC@ +GLLIB = @GLLIB@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +IDL = @IDL@ +IDL_DEPENDENCIES = @IDL_DEPENDENCIES@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +JAR = @JAR@ +JAVAC = @JAVAC@ +JAVAH = @JAVAH@ +JVMLIBS = @JVMLIBS@ +KDECONFIG = @KDECONFIG@ +KDE_CXXFLAGS = @KDE_CXXFLAGS@ +KDE_EXTRA_RPATH = @KDE_EXTRA_RPATH@ +KDE_INCLUDES = @KDE_INCLUDES@ +KDE_LDFLAGS = @KDE_LDFLAGS@ +KDE_PLUGIN = @KDE_PLUGIN@ +KDE_RPATH = @KDE_RPATH@ +KDE_USE_CLOSURE_FALSE = @KDE_USE_CLOSURE_FALSE@ +KDE_USE_CLOSURE_TRUE = @KDE_USE_CLOSURE_TRUE@ +KDE_USE_FINAL_FALSE = @KDE_USE_FINAL_FALSE@ +KDE_USE_FINAL_TRUE = @KDE_USE_FINAL_TRUE@ +KDE_XSL_STYLESHEET = @KDE_XSL_STYLESHEET@ +LIBCOMPAT = @LIBCOMPAT@ +LIBCRYPT = @LIBCRYPT@ +LIBDL = @LIBDL@ +LIBGEN = @LIBGEN@ +LIBJPEG = @LIBJPEG@ +LIBMICO = @LIBMICO@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBPNG = @LIBPNG@ +LIBPTHREAD = @LIBPTHREAD@ +LIBPYTHON = @LIBPYTHON@ +LIBQIMGIO = @LIBQIMGIO@ +LIBRESOLV = @LIBRESOLV@ +LIBSHADOW = @LIBSHADOW@ +LIBSM = @LIBSM@ +LIBSOCKET = @LIBSOCKET@ +LIBTIFF = @LIBTIFF@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIBUCB = @LIBUCB@ +LIBUTIL = @LIBUTIL@ +LIBXINERAMA = @LIBXINERAMA@ +LIBZ = @LIBZ@ +LIB_KAB = @LIB_KAB@ +LIB_KDECORE = @LIB_KDECORE@ +LIB_KDEUI = @LIB_KDEUI@ +LIB_KFILE = @LIB_KFILE@ +LIB_KFM = @LIB_KFM@ +LIB_KFORMULA = @LIB_KFORMULA@ +LIB_KHTML = @LIB_KHTML@ +LIB_KIMGIO = @LIB_KIMGIO@ +LIB_KIO = @LIB_KIO@ +LIB_KPARTS = @LIB_KPARTS@ +LIB_KSPELL = @LIB_KSPELL@ +LIB_KSYCOCA = @LIB_KSYCOCA@ +LIB_KWRITE = @LIB_KWRITE@ +LIB_QT = @LIB_QT@ +LIB_SMB = @LIB_SMB@ +LIB_X11 = @LIB_X11@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +MCOPIDL = @MCOPIDL@ +MEINPROC = @MEINPROC@ +MICO_INCLUDES = @MICO_INCLUDES@ +MICO_LDFLAGS = @MICO_LDFLAGS@ +MOC = @MOC@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +NOOPT_CXXFLAGS = @NOOPT_CXXFLAGS@ +NOREPO = @NOREPO@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PAMLIBS = @PAMLIBS@ +PASSWDLIBS = @PASSWDLIBS@ +PYTHONINC = @PYTHONINC@ +PYTHONLIB = @PYTHONLIB@ +PYTHONMODDIR = @PYTHONMODDIR@ +QT_INCLUDES = @QT_INCLUDES@ +QT_LDFLAGS = @QT_LDFLAGS@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +REPO = @REPO@ +SETUIDFLAGS = @SETUIDFLAGS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TOPSUBDIRS = @TOPSUBDIRS@ +UIC = @UIC@ +UIC_TR = @UIC_TR@ +USER_INCLUDES = @USER_INCLUDES@ +USER_LDFLAGS = @USER_LDFLAGS@ +USE_EXCEPTIONS = @USE_EXCEPTIONS@ +USE_RTTI = @USE_RTTI@ +USE_THREADS = @USE_THREADS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XPMINC = @XPMINC@ +XPMLIB = @XPMLIB@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_INCLUDES = @X_INCLUDES@ +X_LDFLAGS = @X_LDFLAGS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +all_includes = @all_includes@ +all_libraries = @all_libraries@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +idldir = @idldir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +jni_includes = @jni_includes@ +kde_appsdir = @kde_appsdir@ +kde_bindir = @kde_bindir@ +kde_confdir = @kde_confdir@ +kde_datadir = @kde_datadir@ +kde_htmldir = @kde_htmldir@ +kde_icondir = @kde_icondir@ +kde_includes = @kde_includes@ +kde_libraries = @kde_libraries@ +kde_libs_htmldir = @kde_libs_htmldir@ +kde_libs_prefix = @kde_libs_prefix@ +kde_locale = @kde_locale@ +kde_mimedir = @kde_mimedir@ +kde_moduledir = @kde_moduledir@ +kde_qtver = @kde_qtver@ +kde_servicesdir = @kde_servicesdir@ +kde_servicetypesdir = @kde_servicetypesdir@ +kde_sounddir = @kde_sounddir@ +kde_templatesdir = @kde_templatesdir@ +kde_wallpaperdir = @kde_wallpaperdir@ +micodir = @micodir@ +qt_includes = @qt_includes@ +qt_libraries = @qt_libraries@ +x_includes = @x_includes@ +x_libraries = @x_libraries@ + +EXTRA_DIST = $(wildcard *.html) $(wildcard *.htm) $(wildcard *.gif) +docs_DATA = $(EXTRA_DIST) + +docsdir = $(kde_htmldir)/en/kdevelop/$(subdir) +subdir = reference/C/MAN +mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/admin/mkinstalldirs +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +DIST_SOURCES = +DATA = $(docs_DATA) + +DIST_COMMON = Makefile.am Makefile.in +#>- all: all-am +#>+ 1 +all: docs-am all-am + +.SUFFIXES: + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs + +distclean-libtool: + -rm -f libtool +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) +#>- cd $(top_srcdir) && \ +#>- $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu reference/C/MAN/Makefile +#>+ 3 + cd $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu reference/C/MAN/Makefile + cd $(top_srcdir) && perl admin/am_edit reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + cd $(top_builddir) && \ + CONFIG_HEADERS= CONFIG_LINKS= \ + CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ $(SHELL) ./config.status +uninstall-info-am: +install-docsDATA: $(docs_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docsdir) + @list='$(docs_DATA)'; for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + f="`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`"; \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d$$p $(DESTDIR)$(docsdir)/$$f"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d$$p $(DESTDIR)$(docsdir)/$$f; \ + done + +uninstall-docsDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(docs_DATA)'; for p in $$list; do \ + f="`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`"; \ + echo " rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docsdir)/$$f"; \ + rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docsdir)/$$f; \ + done +tags: TAGS +TAGS: + + +#>- DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +#>+ 4 +KDE_DIST=fputs.htm rename.htm modf.htm assert.htm labs.htm asctime.htm setpgid.htm longjmp.htm scanf.htm sleep.htm closedir.htm getpwnam.htm ldexp.htm sysconf.htm wcstombs.htm perror.htm seekdir.htm setlocale.htm toupper.htm realloc.htm calloc.htm fmod.htm seteuid.htm fpathconf.htm frexp.htm telldir.htm readdir.htm ungetc.htm memchr.htm atan2.htm putenv.htm getpw.htm tmpnam.htm ttyname.htm stat.htm memcpy.htm rmdir.htm time.htm cos.htm abs.htm close.htm unsetenv.htm strspn.htm remove.htm strpbrk.htm setjmp.htm pause.htm mbstowcs.htm lseek.htm alarm.htm strtod.htm chroot.htm getopt.htm strcasecmp.htm sinh.htm tan.htm mkdir.htm mbtowc.htm uname.htm sqrt.htm fabs.htm chdir.htm dup2.htm setenv.htm rand.htm getenv.htm stderr.htm setuid.htm perlembed.htm getuid.htm difftime.htm ldiv.htm tanh.htm tmpfile.htm strcoll.htm gets.htm acos.htm floor.htm freopen.htm putpwent.htm exp.htm strlen.htm setegid.htm togetpgrp.htm ceil.htm ctermid.htm index.htm scandir.htm sin.htm atan.htm strstr.htm strcat.htm getpgrp.htm memmove.htm memcmp.htm ioctl.htm opendir.htm unlink.htm fread.htm ferror.htm fgetpwent.htm access.htm chown.htm strftime.htm mblen.htm test getgroupd.htm signal.htm getlogin.htm isatty.htm va_start.htm vfprintf.htm cosh.htm div.htm gethostname.htm setsid.htm memset.htm fflush.htm wctomb.htm getpid.htm cuserid.htm fscanf.htm getpwent.htm fgetpos.htm asin.htm strcspn.htm link.htm setgid.htm clock.htm raise.htm rewinddir.htm setbuf.htm getdid.htm + +DISTFILES= $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) $(KDE_DIST) + + +top_distdir = ../../.. +distdir = $(top_distdir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION) + +distdir: $(DISTFILES) + @for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ + if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + dir=`echo "$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test "$$dir" != "$$file" && test "$$dir" != "."; then \ + $(mkinstalldirs) "$(distdir)/$$dir"; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + cp -pR $$d/$$file $(distdir) \ + || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) + +installdirs: + $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docsdir) + +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + `test -z '$(STRIP)' || \ + echo "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'"` install +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + +distclean-generic: + -rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]* + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +#>- clean: clean-am +#>+ 1 +clean: kde-rpo-clean clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic distclean-libtool + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-docsDATA + +install-exec-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-man: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +uninstall-am: uninstall-docsDATA uninstall-info-am + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool distdir dvi \ + dvi-am info info-am install install-am install-data \ + install-data-am install-docsDATA install-exec install-exec-am \ + install-info install-info-am install-man install-strip \ + installcheck installcheck-am installdirs maintainer-clean \ + maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic \ + mostlyclean-libtool uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-docsDATA \ + uninstall-info-am + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: + +#>+ 2 +docs-am: + +#>+ 6 +force-reedit: + cd $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu reference/C/MAN/Makefile + cd $(top_srcdir) && perl admin/am_edit reference/C/MAN/Makefile.in + + +#>+ 2 +final: + $(MAKE) all-am +#>+ 2 +final-install: + $(MAKE) install-am +#>+ 2 +no-final: + $(MAKE) all-am +#>+ 2 +no-final-install: + $(MAKE) install-am +#>+ 3 +cvs-clean: + $(MAKE) -f $(top_srcdir)/admin/Makefile.common cvs-clean + +#>+ 3 +kde-rpo-clean: + -rm -f *.rpo diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/abs.htm b/reference/C/MAN/abs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3472024 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/abs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +abs + +
+
+
+
+
+
ABS(3)              Linux Programmer's Manual              ABS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       abs - computes the absolute value of an integer.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int abs(int j);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  abs()  function  computes  the  absolute value of the
+       integer argument j.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       Returns the absolute value of the integer argument.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
NOTES
+
       Trying to take the absolute value  of  the  most  negative
+       integer is not defined.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+ceil, +floor, +fabs, +, +rint, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        June 6, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/access.htm b/reference/C/MAN/access.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71154b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/access.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +access + +
+
+
+
+
+
ACCESS(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           ACCESS(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       access - check user's permissions for a file
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int access(const char *pathname, int mode);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       access  checks  whether  the  process  would be allowed to
+       read, write or test for existence of the  file  (or  other
+       file system object) whose name is pathname.
+
+       mode  is  a  mask consisting of one or more of R_OK, W_OK,
+       X_OK and F_OK.
+
+       R_OK, W_OK and X_OK request testing for  reading,  writing
+       and  executing  the  file,  respectively.   F_OK  requests
+       checking whether merely testing for the existence  of  the
+       file  would be allowed (this depends on the permissions of
+       the directories in the path to the file, as given in path-
+       name.)
+
+       The  check  is  done  with the process's real uid and gid,
+       rather than with the effective ids as is done  when  actu-
+       ally  attempting  an  operation.  This is to allow set-UID
+       programs to easily determine the invoking  user's  author-
+       ity.
+
+       Only  access  bits  are checked, not the file type or con-
+       tents.   Therefore,  if  a  directory  is  found   to   be
+       "writable," it probably means that files can be created in
+       the directory, and not that the directory can  be  written
+       as a file.  Similarly, a DOS file may be found to be "exe-
+       cutable," but the execve(2) call will still fail.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EACCES  The  requested  access  would be denied, either to
+               the file itself or one of the directories in path-
+               name.
+
+       EFAULT  pathname  points  outside  your accessible address
+               space.
+
+       EINVAL  mode was incorrectly specified.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               pathname is too long.
+
+       ENOENT  A directory component in pathname would have  been
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.46              21 August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
ACCESS(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           ACCESS(2)
+

+
+               accessible  but  does  not exist or was a dangling
+               symbolic link.
+
+       ENOTDIR A component used as a  directory  in  pathname  is
+               not, in fact, a directory.
+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       ELOOP   pathname  contains  a reference to a circular sym-
+               bolic link, i.e., a  symbolic  link  containing  a
+               reference to itself.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+stat, +open, +chmod, +chown, +setuid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.46              21 August 1994                        2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/acos.htm b/reference/C/MAN/acos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8dce6a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/acos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +acos + +
+
+
+
+
+
ACOS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             ACOS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       acos - arc cosine function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double acos(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  acos()  function calculates the arc cosine of x; that
+       is the value whose cosine is x.  If x  falls  outside  the
+       range -1 to 1, acos() fails and errno is set.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  acos() function returns the arc cosine in radians and
+       the value is mathematically defined to be between 0 and PI
+       (inclusive).
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EDOM   x is out of range.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+asin, +atan, +atan2, +cos, +sin, +tan, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/alarm.htm b/reference/C/MAN/alarm.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1400610 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/alarm.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +alarm + +
+
+
+
+
+
ALARM(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            ALARM(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       alarm - set an alarm clock for delivery of a signal
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       long alarm(long seconds);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       alarm arranges for a SIGALRM signal to be delivered to the
+       process in seconds seconds.
+
+       If seconds is zero, no new alarm is scheduled.
+
+       In any event any previously set alarm is cancelled.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       alarm returns the number of seconds  remaining  until  any
+       previously  scheduled  alarm  was  due to be delivered, or
+       zero if there was no previously scheduled alarm.
+
+
NOTES
+
       alarm and setitimer share the same  timer;  calls  to  one
+       will interfere with use of the other.
+
+       Scheduling delays can, as ever, cause the execution of the
+       process to be delayed by an arbitrary amount of time.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+setitimer, +signal, +sigaction, +gettimeofday, +select, +pause, +sleep, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                      21 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/asctime.htm b/reference/C/MAN/asctime.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d40f4cb --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/asctime.htm @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +asctime + +
+
+
+
+
+
CTIME(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            CTIME(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       asctime,  ctime,  gmtime,  localtime,  mktime  - transform
+       binary date and time to ASCII
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <time.h>
+
+       char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr);
+
+       char *ctime(const time_t *timep);
+
+       struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timep);
+
+       struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timep);
+
+       time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);
+
+       extern char *tzname[2];
+       long int timezone;
+       extern int daylight;
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The ctime(), gmtime() and localtime() functions  all  take
+       an  argument of data type time_t which represents calendar
+       time.  When interpreted as an absolute time value, it rep-
+       resents  the  number  of seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 on
+       January 1, 1970, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
+
+       The asctime() and mktime() functions both take an argument
+       representing  broken-down time which is a binary represen-
+       tation separated into year, month, day, etc.   Broken-down
+       time  is  stored  in  the structure tm which is defined in
+       <time.h> as follows:
+
+              struct tm
+              {
+                      int     tm_sec;         /* seconds */
+                      int     tm_min;         /* minutes */
+                      int     tm_hour;        /* hours */
+                      int     tm_mday;        /* day of the month */
+                      int     tm_mon;         /* month */
+                      int     tm_year;        /* year */
+                      int     tm_wday;        /* day of the week */
+                      int     tm_yday;        /* day in the year */
+                      int     tm_isdst;       /* daylight saving time */
+              };
+
+       The members of the tm structure are:
+
+       tm_sec The number of seconds after the minute, normally in
+              the range 0 to 59, but can be up to 61 to allow for
+              leap seconds.
+
+       tm_min The number of minutes after the hour, in the  range
+
+
+
+
BSD                       June 30, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
CTIME(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            CTIME(3)
+

+
+              0 to 59.
+
+       tm_hour
+              The  number  of hours past midnight, in the range 0
+              to 23.
+
+       tm_mday
+              The day of the month, in the range 1 to 31.
+
+       tm_mon The number of months since January, in the range  0
+              to 11.
+
+       tm_year
+              The number of years since 1900.
+
+       tm_wday
+              The  number of days since Sunday, in the range 0 to
+              6.
+
+       tm_yday
+              The number of days since January 1, in the range  0
+              to 365.
+
+       tm_isdst
+              A  flag that indicates whether daylight saving time
+              is in effect at the time described.  The  value  is
+              positive if daylight saving time is in effect, zero
+              if it is not, and negative if  the  information  is
+              not available.
+
+       The ctime() function converts the calendar time timep into
+       a string of the form
+
+              "Wed Jun 30 21:49:08 1993\n"
+
+       The abbreviations for the days  of  the  week  are  `Sun',
+       `Mon',  `Tue', `Wed', `Thu', `Fri', and `Sat'.  The abbre-
+       viations for the months are `Jan',  `Feb',  `Mar',  `Apr',
+       `May',  `Jun',  `Jul',  `Aug',  `Sep',  `Oct',  `Nov', and
+       `Dec'.  The return value points to a statically  allocated
+       string  which  might be overwritten by subsequent calls to
+       any of the date and time  functions.   The  function  also
+       sets  the  external variable tzname with information about
+       the current time zone.
+
+       The gmtime() function converts the calendar time timep  to
+       broken-down  time representation, expressed in Coordinated
+       Universal Time (UTC).
+
+       The localtime() function converts the calendar time  timep
+       to  broken-time  representation, expressed relative to the
+       user's specified  time  zone.     The  function  sets  the
+       external  variables tzname with information about the cur-
+       rent time  zone,  timezone  with  the  difference  between
+
+
+
+
BSD                       June 30, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+
+
+
CTIME(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            CTIME(3)
+

+
+       Coordinated  Universal  Time (UTC) and local standard time
+       in seconds, and daylight to a non-zero value  if  standard
+       US daylight savings time rules apply.
+
+       The asctime() function converts the broken-down time value
+       timeptr into a string with the  same  format  as  ctime().
+       The  return  value points to a statically allocated string
+       which might be overwritten by subsequent calls to  any  of
+       the date and time functions.
+
+       The  mktime()  function converts a broken-down time struc-
+       ture  to  calendar  time  representation.   The   function
+       ignores  the  specified  contents of the structure members
+       tm_wday and tm_yday and recomputes  them  from  the  other
+       information  in  the  broken-down time structure.  Calling
+       mktime() also  sets  the  external  variable  tzname  with
+       information about the current time zone.  If the specified
+       broken-down time cannot be represented as  calendar  time,
+       mktime()  returns  a  value  of  (time_t)(-1) and does not
+       alter the tm_wday and tm_yday members of  the  broken-down
+       time structure.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+date, +gettimeofday, +time, +tzset, +difftime, +strftime, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD                       June 30, 1993                         3
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/asin.htm b/reference/C/MAN/asin.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b742beb --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/asin.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +asin + +
+
+
+
+
+
ASIN(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             ASIN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       asin - arc sine function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double asin(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  asin() function calculates the arc sine of x; that is
+       the value whose sine is x.  If x falls outside  the  range
+       -1 to 1, asin() fails and errno is set.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  asin()  function  returns the arc sine in radians and
+       the value is mathematically defined to  be  between  -PI/2
+       and PI/2 (inclusive).
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EDOM   x is out of range.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acos, +atan, +atan2, +cos, +sin, +tan, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/assert.htm b/reference/C/MAN/assert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5656d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/assert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +assert + +
+
+
+
+
+
ASSERT(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           ASSERT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       assert - Abort the program if assertion is false.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <assert.h>
+
+       void assert (int expression);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       assert()  prints  an  error message to standard output and
+       terminates the program by calling abort() if expression is
+       false  (i.e.,  compares equal to zero).  This only happens
+       when the macro NDEBUG is undefined.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       No value is returned.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C
+
+
BUGS
+
       assert() is implemented as  a  macro;  if  the  expression
+       tested  has side - effects, program behaviour will be dif-
+       ferent depending on whether NDEBUG is  defined.  This  may
+       create  Heisenbugs  which go away when debugging is turned
+       on.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+exit, +abort, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/atan.htm b/reference/C/MAN/atan.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c4509a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/atan.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +atan + +
+
+
+
+
+
ATAN(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             ATAN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       atan - arc tangent function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double atan(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  atan() function calculates the arc tangent of x; that
+       is the value whose tangent is x.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The atan() function returns the arc tangent in radians and
+       the  value  is  mathematically defined to be between -PI/2
+       and PI/2 (inclusive).
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acos, +asin, +atan2, +cos, +sin, +tan, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/atan2.htm b/reference/C/MAN/atan2.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5910e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/atan2.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +atan2 + +
+
+
+
+
+
ATAN2(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            ATAN2(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       atan2 - arc tangent function of two variables
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double atan2(double y, double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The atan2() function calculates the arc tangent of the two
+       variables x and y.  It is similar to calculating  the  arc
+       tangent  of y / x, except that the signs of both arguments
+       are used to determine the quadrant of the result.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The atan2() function returns the result in radians,  which
+       is between -PI and PI (inclusive).
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acos, +asin, +atan, +cos, +sin, +tan, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/calloc.htm b/reference/C/MAN/calloc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fadf4e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/calloc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +calloc + +
+
+
+
+
+
MALLOC(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MALLOC(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       calloc,  malloc, free, realloc - Allocate and free dynamic
+       memory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+       void *malloc(size_t size);
+       void free(void *ptr);
+       void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       calloc() allocates memory for an array of  nmemb  elements
+       of  size bytes each and returns a pointer to the allocated
+       memory.  The memory is set to zero.
+
+       malloc() allocates size bytes and returns a pointer to the
+       allocated memory.  The memory is not cleared.
+
+       free()  frees  the  memory  space pointed to by ptr, which
+       must have been returned by a previous  call  to  malloc(),
+       calloc()  or  realloc().   If ptr is NULL, no operation is
+       performed.
+
+       realloc() changes the size of the memory block pointed  to
+       by  ptr  to size bytes.  The contents will be unchanged to
+       the minimum of the old an new sizes; newly allocated  mem-
+       ory  will  be  uninitialized.  If ptr is NULL, the call is
+       equivalent to malloc(size); if size is equal to zero,  the
+       call  is  equivalent to free(ptr).  Unless ptr is NULL, it
+       must have been returned by an earlier  call  to  malloc(),
+       calloc() or realloc().
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       For calloc() and malloc(), the value returned is a pointer
+       to the allocated memory, which is suitably aligned for any
+       kind of variable, or NULL if the request fails.
+
+       free() returns no value.
+
+       realloc() returns a pointer to the newly allocated memory,
+       which is suitably aligned for any kind of variable and may
+       be  different from ptr, or NULL if the request fails or if
+       size was equal to 0.   If  realloc()  fails  the  original
+       block is left untouched - it is not freed or moved.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+brk, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ceil.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ceil.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa474c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ceil.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +ceil + +
+
+
+
+
+
CEIL(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             CEIL(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       ceil - smallest integral value not less than x
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double ceil (double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  ceil() function rounds x upwards to the nearest inte-
+       ger, returning that value as a double.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+abs, +fabs, +floor, +, +rint, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 6, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/chdir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/chdir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..da59d26 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/chdir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +chdir + +
+
+
+
+
+
CHDIR(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            CHDIR(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       chdir, fchdir - change working directory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int chdir(const char *path);
+       int fchdir(int fd);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       chdir  changes  the current directory to that specified in
+       path.
+
+       fchdir is identical to chdir, only that the  directory  is
+       given as an open file descriptor.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       Depending  on  the  file  system,  other  errors  can   be
+       returned.  The more general errors are listed below:
+
+
+       EPERM   The  process  does  not have execute permission on
+               the directory.
+
+       EFAULT  path points outside your accessible address space.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               path is too long.
+
+       EBADF   The fd is not a valid file descriptor.
+
+       ENOENT  The file does not exist.
+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       ENOTDIR A component of the path prefix is not a directory.
+
+       EACCES  Search permission is denied on a component of  the
+               path prefix.
+
+       ELOOP   path  contains  a  circular reference (i.e., via a
+               symbolic link)
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getcwd, +chroot, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.4               15 April 1995                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/chown.htm b/reference/C/MAN/chown.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51106de --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/chown.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +chown + +
+
+
+
+
+
CHOWN(1L)                                               CHOWN(1L)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       chown - change the user and group ownership of files
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       chown  [-Rcfv]  [--recursive] [--changes] [--help] [--ver-
+       sion] [--silent] [--quiet]  [--verbose]  [user][:.][group]
+       file...
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       This  manual  page  documents  the  GNU  version of chown.
+       chown changes the user  and/or  group  ownership  of  each
+       given  file,  according  to its first non-option argument,
+       which is interpreted as follows.  If only a user name  (or
+       numeric  user ID) is given, that user is made the owner of
+       each given file, and the files' group is not changed.   If
+       the  user  name  is followed by a colon or dot and a group
+       name (or numeric group ID), with no spaces  between  them,
+       the group ownership of the files is changed as well.  If a
+       colon or dot but no group name follows the user name, that
+       user  is  made the owner of the files and the group of the
+       files is changed to that user's login group.  If the colon
+       or  dot and group are given, but the user name is omitted,
+       only the group of the files  is  changed;  in  this  case,
+       chown performs the same function as chgrp.
+
+   OPTIONS
+       -c, --changes
+              Verbosely describe only files whose ownership actu-
+              ally changes.
+
+       -f, --silent, --quiet
+              Do not print error messages about files whose  own-
+              ership cannot be changed.
+
+       -v, --verbose
+              Verbosely describe ownership changes.
+
+       -R, --recursive
+              Recursively  change  ownership  of  directories and
+              their contents.
+
+       --help Print a usage message on standard output  and  exit
+              successfully.
+
+       --version
+              Print  version  information on standard output then
+              exit successfully.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FSF                     GNU File Utilities                      1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/chroot.htm b/reference/C/MAN/chroot.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0863dbb --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/chroot.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +chroot + +
+
+
+
+
+
CHROOT(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           CHROOT(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       chroot - change root directory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int chroot(const char *path);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       chroot  changes  the  root  directory to that specified in
+       path.  This directory will be used for path name beginning
+       with  /.   The root directory is inherited by all children
+       of the current process.
+
+       Only the super-user may change the root directory.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       Depending   on  the  file  system,  other  errors  can  be
+       returned.  The more general errors are listed below:
+
+
+       EPERM   The effective UID does not match the owner of  the
+               file,  and is not zero; or the owner or group were
+               specified incorrectly.
+
+       EROFS   The named file resides on a read-only file system.
+
+       EFAULT  path points outside your accessible address space.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               path is too long.
+
+       ENOENT  The file does not exist.
+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       ENOTDIR A component of the path prefix is not a directory.
+
+       EACCES  Search  permission is denied on a component of the
+               path prefix.
+
+       ELOOP   path contains a circular reference  (i.e.,  via  a
+               symbolic link)
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+chdir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.46              21 August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/clock.htm b/reference/C/MAN/clock.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd844a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/clock.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +clock + +
+
+
+
+
+
CLOCK(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            CLOCK(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       clock - Determine processor time
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <time.h>
+
+       clock_t clock(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The clock() function returns an approximation of processor
+       time used by the program.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The value returned is the  CPU  time  used  so  far  as  a
+       clock_t;  to  get  the  number  of seconds used, divide by
+       CLOCKS_PER_SEC.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI C
+
+
BUGS
+
       The C standard allows for arbitrary values at the start of
+       the   program;  take  the  difference  between  the  value
+       returned from a call to clock() at the start of  the  pro-
+       gram and the end to get maximum portability.
+
+       The times() function call returns more information.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+times, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 21, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/close.htm b/reference/C/MAN/close.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2164bc --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/close.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +close + +
+
+
+
+
+
CLOSE(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            CLOSE(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       close - close a file descriptor
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int close(int fd);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       close  closes  a  file  descriptor,  so  that it no longer
+       refers to any file and may be reused.
+
+       If fd is the last copy of a particular file descriptor the
+       resources  associated  with  it are freed; for example any
+       locks held are removed and if the descriptor was the  last
+       reference  to  a  file which has been removed using unlink
+       the file is deleted.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       close returns zero on success, or -1 if an error occurred.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  fd isn't a valid open file descriptor.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
NOTES
+
       Not  checking  the  return  value of close is a common but
+       nevertheless  serious  programming  error.   File   system
+       implementations  which  use techniques as ``write-behind''
+       to increase performance may lead to  write(2)  succeeding,
+       although  the  data  has  not been written yet.  The error
+       status may be reported at a later write operation, but  it
+       is  guaranteed  to  be  reported on closing the file.  Not
+       checking the return value when closing the file  may  lead
+       to  silent  loss of data.  This can especially be observed
+       with NFS and disk quotas.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+open, +fcntl, +shutdown, +unlink, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                        February 18, 1995                       1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/closedir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/closedir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..81de2de --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/closedir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +closedir + +
+
+
+
+
+
CLOSEDIR(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         CLOSEDIR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       closedir - close a directory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       #include <dirent.h>
+
+       int closedir(DIR *dir);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  closedir() function closes the directory stream asso-
+       ciated with dir.  The directory stream descriptor  dir  is
+       not available after this call.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  closedir()  function  returns  0  on success or -1 on
+       failure.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  Invalid directory stream descriptor dir.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+close, +opendir, +readdir, +rewinddir, +seekdir, +telldir, +scandir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           11 June 1995                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/cos.htm b/reference/C/MAN/cos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d815245 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/cos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +cos + +
+
+
+
+
+
COS(3)              Linux Programmer's Manual              COS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       cos - cosine function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double cos(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  cos()  function  returns  the cosine of x, where x is
+       given in radians.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The cos() function returns a value between -1 and 1.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acos, +asin, +atan, +atan2, +sin, +tan, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/cosh.htm b/reference/C/MAN/cosh.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..efc0b4a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/cosh.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +cosh + +
+
+
+
+
+
COSH(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             COSH(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       cosh - hyperbolic cosine function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double cosh(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  cosh()  function  returns the hyperbolic cosine of x,
+       which is defined mathematically as exp(x) + exp(-x) / 2.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acosh, +asinh, +atanh, +sinh, +tanh, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          June 13, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ctermid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ctermid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d852127 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ctermid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +ctermid + +
+
+
+
+
+
CTERMID(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          CTERMID(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       ctermid - get controlling terminal name
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       char *ctermid(char *s);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       ctermid()  returns  a string which is the pathname for the
+       current controlling terminal for this process.   If  s  is
+       NULL,  a  static  buffer  is used, otherwise s points to a
+       buffer used to hold the terminal pathname.   The  symbolic
+       constant  L_ctermid is the maximum number of characters in
+       the returned pathname.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The pointer to the pathname.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       The path returned may not uniquely identify  the  control-
+       ling terminal; it may, for example, be /dev/tty.
+
+       It  is not assured that the program can open the terminal.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+ttyname, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 6, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/cuserid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/cuserid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c398287 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/cuserid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +cuserid + +
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/difftime.htm b/reference/C/MAN/difftime.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e067c9c --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/difftime.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +difftime + +
+
+
+
+
+
DIFFTIME(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         DIFFTIME(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       difftime - calculate time difference
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <time.h>
+
+       double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  difftime()  function  returns  the  number of seconds
+       elapsed between time time1 and time time0.  The two  times
+       are  specified in calendar time, which represents the time
+       elapsed since 00:00:00 on  January  1,  1970,  Coordinated
+       Universal Time (UTC).
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+date, +gettimeofday, +time, +ctime, +gmtime, +, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        July 2, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/div.htm b/reference/C/MAN/div.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff3b170 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/div.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +div + +
+
+
+
+
+
DIV(3)              Linux Programmer's Manual              DIV(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       div - computes the quotient and remainder of integer divi-
+       sion
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       div_t div(int numer, int denom);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The div() function  computes  the  value  numer/denom  and
+       returns  the  quotient  and remainder in a structure named
+       div_t that contains two integer  members  named  quot  and
+       rem.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The div_t structure.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 6, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/dup.htm b/reference/C/MAN/dup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ade0c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/dup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +dup + +
+
+
+
+
+
DUP(2)              Linux Programmer's Manual              DUP(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       dup, dup2 - duplicate a file descriptor
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int dup(int oldfd);
+       int dup2(int oldfd, int newfd);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       dup and dup2 create a copy of the file descriptor oldfd.
+
+       The  old  and new descriptors may be used interchangeably.
+       They share locks, file position pointers  and  flags;  for
+       example,  if  the file position is modified by using lseek
+       on one of the descriptors, the position  is  also  changed
+       for the other.
+
+       The  two  descriptors do not share the close-on-exec flag,
+       however.
+
+       dup uses the lowest-numbered unused descriptor for the new
+       descriptor.
+
+       dup2 makes newfd be the copy of oldfd, closing newfd first
+       if necessary.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       dup and dup2 return the new descriptor, or -1 if an  error
+       occurred (in which case, errno is set appropriately).
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  oldfd  isn't  an  open file descriptor, or newfd is
+              out of the allowed range for file descriptors.
+
+       EMFILE The process already has the maximum number of  file
+              descriptors open and tried to open a new one.
+
+
WARNING
+
       The  error  returned by dup2 is different to that returned
+       by fcntl(...,F_DUPFD,...)  when newfd is out of range.  On
+       some  systems  dup2  also  sometimes  returns  EINVAL like
+       F_DUPFD.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fcntl, +open, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.46              21 August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/dup2.htm b/reference/C/MAN/dup2.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74e702f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/dup2.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +dup2 + +
+
+
+
+
+
DUP(2)              Linux Programmer's Manual              DUP(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       dup, dup2 - duplicate a file descriptor
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int dup(int oldfd);
+       int dup2(int oldfd, int newfd);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       dup and dup2 create a copy of the file descriptor oldfd.
+
+       The  old  and new descriptors may be used interchangeably.
+       They share locks, file position pointers  and  flags;  for
+       example,  if  the file position is modified by using lseek
+       on one of the descriptors, the position  is  also  changed
+       for the other.
+
+       The  two  descriptors do not share the close-on-exec flag,
+       however.
+
+       dup uses the lowest-numbered unused descriptor for the new
+       descriptor.
+
+       dup2 makes newfd be the copy of oldfd, closing newfd first
+       if necessary.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       dup and dup2 return the new descriptor, or -1 if an  error
+       occurred (in which case, errno is set appropriately).
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  oldfd  isn't  an  open file descriptor, or newfd is
+              out of the allowed range for file descriptors.
+
+       EMFILE The process already has the maximum number of  file
+              descriptors open and tried to open a new one.
+
+
WARNING
+
       The  error  returned by dup2 is different to that returned
+       by fcntl(...,F_DUPFD,...)  when newfd is out of range.  On
+       some  systems  dup2  also  sometimes  returns  EINVAL like
+       F_DUPFD.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fcntl, +open, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.46              21 August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/exp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/exp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9b9cc1a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/exp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +exp + +
+
+
+
+
+
EXP(3)              Linux Programmer's Manual              EXP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       exp,  log, log10, pow - exponential, logarithmic and power
+       functions
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double exp(double x);
+
+       double log(double x);
+
+       double log10(double x);
+
+       double pow(double x, double y);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The exp() function returns the value of  e  (the  base  of
+       natural logarithms) raised to the power of x.
+
+       The log() function returns the natural logarithm of x.
+
+       The log10() function returns the base-10 logarithm of x.
+
+       The  pow()  function  returns the value of x raised to the
+       power of y.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       The log() and log10() functions can return  the  following
+       errors:
+
+       EDOM   The argument x is negative.
+
+       ERANGE The  argument  x  is  zero.  The log of zero is not
+              defined.
+
+       The pow() function can return the following error:
+
+       EDOM   The argument x is negative and y is not an integral
+              value.  This would result in a complex number.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+sqrt, +cbrt, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       June 16, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fabs.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fabs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1950e78 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fabs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +fabs + +
+
+
+
+
+
FABS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             FABS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fabs - absolute value of floating-point number
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double fabs(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  fabs()  function  returns  the  absolute value of the
+       floating-point number x.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+abs, +ceil, +floor, +, +rint, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          June 25, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/feof.htm b/reference/C/MAN/feof.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e28f6f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/feof.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +feof + +
+
+
+
+
+
FEOF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           FEOF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       clearerr,  feof,  ferror,  fileno - check and reset stream
+       status
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       void clearerr( FILE *stream);
+       int feof( FILE *stream);
+       int ferror( FILE *stream);
+       int fileno( FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The function clearerr clears  the  end-of-file  and  error
+       indicators for the stream pointed to by stream.
+
+       The  function feof tests the end-of-file indicator for the
+       stream pointed to by stream, returning non-zero if  it  is
+       set.  The end-of-file indicator can only be cleared by the
+       function clearerr.
+
+       The function ferror tests  the  error  indicator  for  the
+       stream  pointed  to by stream, returning non-zero if it is
+       set.  The error indicator can only be reset by the  clear-
+       err function.
+
+       The  function  fileno  examines  the  argument  stream and
+       returns its integer descriptor.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       These functions should not fail and do not set the  exter-
+       nal variable errno.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+open, +stdio, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  functions  clearerr,  feof,  and  ferror  conform  to
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ferror.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ferror.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0defdd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ferror.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +ferror + +
+
+
+
+
+
FERROR(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           FERROR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       clearerr,  feof,  ferror,  fileno - check and reset stream
+       status
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       void clearerr( FILE *stream);
+       int feof( FILE *stream);
+       int ferror( FILE *stream);
+       int fileno( FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The function clearerr clears  the  end-of-file  and  error
+       indicators for the stream pointed to by stream.
+
+       The  function feof tests the end-of-file indicator for the
+       stream pointed to by stream, returning non-zero if  it  is
+       set.  The end-of-file indicator can only be cleared by the
+       function clearerr.
+
+       The function ferror tests  the  error  indicator  for  the
+       stream  pointed  to by stream, returning non-zero if it is
+       set.  The error indicator can only be reset by the  clear-
+       err function.
+
+       The  function  fileno  examines  the  argument  stream and
+       returns its integer descriptor.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       These functions should not fail and do not set the  exter-
+       nal variable errno.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+open, +stdio, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  functions  clearerr,  feof,  and  ferror  conform  to
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fflush.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fflush.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fae4396 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fflush.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +fflush + +
+
+
+
+
+
FFLUSH(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           FFLUSH(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fflush, fpurge - flush a stream
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fflush( FILE *stream);
+       int fpurge( FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  function  fflush  forces a write of all buffered data
+       for the given output or update  stream  via  the  stream's
+       underlying  write function.  The open status of the stream
+       is unaffected.
+
+       If the stream argument is NULL, fflush  flushes  all  open
+       output streams. (Does this happen under Linux)
+
+       The function fpurge erases any input or output buffered in
+       the given stream.  For output streams  this  discards  any
+       unwritten  output.   For  input  streams this discards any
+       input read from the underlying object but not yet obtained
+       via  getc(3);  this  includes  any  text  pushed  back via
+       ungetc.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       Upon successful completion 0 is returned.  Otherwise,  EOF
+       is  returned and the global variable errno is set to indi-
+       cate the error.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  Stream is not an open stream, or, in  the  case  of
+              fflush, not a stream open for writing.
+
+       The function fflush may also fail and set errno for any of
+       the errors specified for the routine write(2).
+
+
BUGS
+
       Linux may not support fpurge.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+write, +fopen, +fclose, +setbuf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The fflush function conforms to ANSI  C3.159-1989  (``ANSI
+       C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fgetpos.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fgetpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd76134 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fgetpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +fgetpos + +
+
+
+
+
+
FSEEK(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FSEEK(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fgetpos,  fseek,  fsetpos,  ftell,  rewind  - reposition a
+       stream
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fseek( FILE *stream, long offset, int whence);
+       long ftell( FILE *stream);
+       void rewind( FILE *stream);
+       int fgetpos( FILE *stream, fpos_t *pos);
+       int fsetpos( FILE *stream, fpos_t *pos);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The fseek function sets the file  position  indicator  for
+       the  stream  pointed to by stream.  The new position, mea-
+       sured in bytes, is obtained by adding offset bytes to  the
+       position  specified  by  whence.   If  whence  is  set  to
+       SEEK_SET, SEEK_CUR, or SEEK_END, the offset is relative to
+       the  start of the file, the current position indicator, or
+       end-of-file, respectively.  A successful call to the fseek
+       function  clears  the end-of-file indicator for the stream
+       and undoes any effects of the ungetc(3)  function  on  the
+       same stream.
+
+       The  ftell  function obtains the current value of the file
+       position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
+
+       The rewind function sets the file position  indicator  for
+       the  stream  pointed  to by stream to the beginning of the
+       file.  It is equivalent to:
+
+              (void)fseek(stream, 0L, SEEK_SET)
+
+       except that the error indicator for  the  stream  is  also
+       cleared (see clearerr(3).
+
+       The fgetpos and fsetpos functions are alternate interfaces
+       equivalent  to  ftell  and  fseek  (with  whence  set   to
+       SEEK_SET),  setting  and  storing the current value of the
+       file offset into or from the object referenced by pos.  On
+       some  non-UNIX  systems  an fpos_t object may be a complex
+       object and these routines may be the only way to  portably
+       reposition a text stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       The  rewind  function  returns  no value.  Upon successful
+       completion, fgetpos, fseek, fsetpos return  0,  and  ftell
+       returns the current offset.  Otherwise, -1 is returned and
+       the global variable errno is set to indicate the error.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  The stream specified is not a seekable stream.
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
FSEEK(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FSEEK(3)
+

+
+       EINVAL The whence argument  to  fseek  was  not  SEEK_SET,
+              SEEK_END, or SEEK_CUR.
+
+       The  function  fgetpos, fseek, fsetpos, and ftell may also
+       fail and set errno for any of the errors specified for the
+       routines fflush(3), fstat(2), lseek(2), and malloc(3).
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+lseek, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fgetpos,  fsetpos, fseek, ftell, and rewind functions
+       conform to ANSI C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fgetpwent.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fgetpwent.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07e11bb --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fgetpwent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +fgetpwent + +
+
+
+
+
+
FGETPWENT(3)        Linux Programmer's Manual        FGETPWENT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fgetpwent - get password file entry
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <pwd.h>
+       #include <stdio.h>
+       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       struct passwd *fgetpwent(FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  fgetpwent() function returns a pointer to a structure
+       containing the broken out fields of a  line  in  the  file
+       stream.   The first time it is called it returns the first
+       entry; thereafter, it  returns  successive  entries.   The
+       file stream must have the same format as /etc/passwd.
+
+       The passwd structure is defined in <pwd.h> as follows:
+
+              struct passwd {
+                      char    *pw_name;       /* user name */
+                      char    *pw_passwd;     /* user password */
+                      uid_t   pw_uid;         /* user id */
+                      gid_t   pw_gid;         /* group id */
+                      char    *pw_gecos;      /* real name */
+                      char    *pw_dir;        /* home directory */
+                      char    *pw_shell;      /* shell program */
+              };
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  fgetpwent() function returns the passwd structure, or
+       NULL if there are no more entries or an error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ENOMEM Insufficient memory to allocate passwd structure.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getpwnam, +getpwuid, +getpwent, +setpwent, +getpw, +putpwent, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 9, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/floor.htm b/reference/C/MAN/floor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2f4d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/floor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +floor + +
+
+
+
+
+
FLOOR(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FLOOR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       floor - largest integral value not greater than x
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double floor(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  floor()  function  rounds  x downwards to the nearest
+       integer, returning that value as a double.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+abs, +fabs, +ceil, +rint, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 6, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fmod.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fmod.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f32aa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fmod.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +fmod + +
+
+
+
+
+
FMOD(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             FMOD(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fmod - floating-point remainder function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double fmod(double x, double y);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  modf()  function computes the remainder of dividing x
+       by y.  The return value is x - n * y, where n is the  quo-
+       tient of x / y, rounded towards zero to an integer.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  fmod()  function  returns  the remainder, unless y is
+       zero, when the function fails and errno is set.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EDOM   The denominator y is zero.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+drem, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 6, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fopen.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fopen.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e39942 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fopen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +fopen + +
+
+
+
+
+
FOPEN(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FOPEN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fopen, fdopen, freopen - stream open functions
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       FILE *fopen( char *path, char *mode);
+       FILE *fdopen( int fildes, char *mode);
+       FILE *freopen( char *path, char *mode, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The fopen function opens the file whose name is the string
+       pointed to by path and associates a stream with it.
+
+       The argument mode points to a string beginning with one of
+       the  following sequences (Additional characters may follow
+       these sequences.):
+
+       r      Open text file for reading.  The  stream  is  posi-
+              tioned at the beginning of the file.
+
+       r+     Open  for reading and writing.  The stream is posi-
+              tioned at the beginning of the file.
+
+       w      Truncate file to zero length or  create  text  file
+              for  writing.   The  stream  is  positioned  at the
+              beginning of the file.
+
+       w+     Open for reading and writing.  The file is  created
+              if  it  does  not exist, otherwise it is truncated.
+              The stream is positioned at the  beginning  of  the
+              file.
+
+       a      Open  for  writing.  The file is created if it does
+              not exist.  The stream is positioned at the end  of
+              the file.
+
+       a+     Open  for reading and writing.  The file is created
+              if it does not exist.  The stream is positioned  at
+              the end of the file.
+
+       The  mode  string can also include the letter ``b'' either
+       as a third character or as a character between the charac-
+       ters  in any of the two-character strings described above.
+       This is strictly for compatibility with  ANSI  C3.159-1989
+       (``ANSI  C'')  and  has  no  effect; the ``b'' is ignored.
+       Linux may not behave this way.
+
+       Any      created      files      will      have       mode
+       S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR|S_IRGRP|S_IWGRP|S_IROTH|S_IWOTH (0666), as
+       modified by the process' umask value (see umask(2).
+
+       Reads and writes may be intermixed on  read/write  streams
+       in  any  order, and do not require an intermediate seek as
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
FOPEN(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FOPEN(3)
+

+
+       in previous versions of stdio.  This is  not  portable  to
+       other  systems,  however,  and  may  not  work under Linux
+       (someone should find out and fix  this  manpage);  ANSI  C
+       requires   that  a  file  positioning  function  intervene
+       between  output  and  input,  unless  an  input  operation
+       encounters end-of-file.
+
+       The  fdopen function associates a stream with the existing
+       file descriptor, fildes.  The mode of the stream  must  be
+       compatible with the mode of the file descriptor.
+
+       The  freopen  function  opens  the  file whose name is the
+       string pointed  to  by  path  and  associates  the  stream
+       pointed  to by stream with it.  The original stream (if it
+       exists) is closed.  The mode argument is used just  as  in
+       the  fopen function.  The primary use of the freopen func-
+       tion is to change the file associated with a standard text
+       stream (stderr, stdin, or stdout).
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       Upon  successful  completion  fopen,  fdopen  and  freopen
+       return a FILE pointer.  Otherwise, NULL  is  returned  and
+       the global variable errno is set to indicate the error.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINVAL The  mode provided to fopen, fdopen, or freopen was
+              invalid.
+
+       The fopen, fdopen and freopen functions may also fail  and
+       set  errno for any of the errors specified for the routine
+       malloc(3).
+
+       The fopen function may also fail and set errno for any  of
+       the errors specified for the routine open(2).
+
+       The fdopen function may also fail and set errno for any of
+       the errors specified for the routine fcntl(2).
+
+       The freopen function may also fail and set errno  for  any
+       of   the   errors  specified  for  the  routines  open(2),
+       fclose(3) and fflush(3).
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+open, +fclose, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fopen  and  freopen   functions   conform   to   ANSI
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').  The fdopen function conforms to
+       IEEE Std1003.1-1988 (``POSIX'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fpathconf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fpathconf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c10bda2 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fpathconf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +pathconf + +
+
+
+
+
+
FPATHCONF(3)        Linux Programmer's Manual        FPATHCONF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fpathconf, pathconf - get configuration values for files
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       long fpathconf(int filedes, int name);
+       long pathconf(char *path, int name);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       fpathconf() gets a value for the configuration option name
+       for the open file descriptor filedes.
+
+       pathconf() gets a value for configuration option name  for
+       the file name path.
+
+       The  corresponding  macros  defined  in <unistd.h> minimum
+       values; if an application wants to take advantage of  val-
+       ues  which may change, a call to fpathconf() or pathconf()
+       can be made, which may yield more liberal results.
+
+       Setting name equal  to  one  of  the  following  constants
+       returns the following configuration options:
+
+       _PC_LINK_MAX
+              returns  the  maximum  number of links to the file.
+              If filedes or path refer to a directory,  then  the
+              value  applies  to the whole directory.  The corre-
+              sponding macro is _POSIX_LINK_MAX.
+
+       _PC_MAX_CANON
+              returns the maximum length  of  a  formatted  input
+              line,  where filedes or path must refer to a termi-
+              nal.  The corresponding macro is  _POSIX_MAX_CANON.
+
+       _PC_MAX_INPUT
+              returns  the maximum length of an input line, where
+              filedes or path must refer to a terminal.  The cor-
+              responding macro is _POSIX_MAX_INPUT.
+
+       _PC_NAME_MAX
+              returns  the  maximum  length  of a filename in the
+              directory path or filedes.  the process is  allowed
+              to create.  _POSIX_MAX_.
+
+       _PC_PATH_MAX
+              returns  the  maximum length of a relative pathname
+              when path or filedes is the current working  direc-
+              tory.   The corresponding macro is _POSIX_PATH_MAX.
+
+       _PC_PIPE_BUF
+              returns the size of the pipe buffer, where  filedes
+              must refer to a pipe or FIFO and path must refer to
+              a FIFO. The corresponding macro is _POSIX_PIPE_BUF.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
FPATHCONF(3)        Linux Programmer's Manual        FPATHCONF(3)
+

+
+       _PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
+              returns  nonzero  if  the  chown(2) call may not be
+              used on this file.  If filedes or path refer  to  a
+              directory,  then  this applies to all files in that
+              directory.     The    corresponding    macro     is
+              _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED.
+
+       _PC_NO_TRUNC
+              returns  nonzero if accessing filenames longer than
+              _POSIX_NAME_MAX generates  an  error.   The  corre-
+              sponding macro is _POSIX_NO_TRUNC.
+
+       _PC_VDISABLE
+              returns nonzero if special character processing can
+              be disabled, where filedes or path must refer to  a
+              terminal.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  limit is returned, if one exists.  If the system does
+       not have  a  limit  for  the  requested  resource,  -1  is
+       returned,  and  errno is unchanged.  If there is an error,
+       -1 is returned, and errno is set to reflect the nature  of
+       the error.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX.1  Files  with  name  lengths  longer than the value
+       returned for name equal to _PC_NAME_MAX may exist  in  the
+       given directory.
+
+       Some  returned  values  may be huge; they are not suitable
+       for allocating memory.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getconf, +statfs, +open, +sysconf, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fputs.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fputs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4bf47d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fputs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +fputs + +
+
+
+
+
+
PUTS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             PUTS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fputc,  fputs,  putc, putchar, puts - output of characters
+       and strings
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
+       int fputs(const char *s, FILE *stream);
+       int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
+       int putchar(int c);
+       int puts(char *s);
+       int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       fputc() writes the character c, cast to an unsigned  char,
+       to stream.
+
+       fputs()  writes the string s to stream, without its trail-
+       ing '\0'.
+
+       putc() is equivalent to fputc()  except  that  it  may  be
+       implemented  as  a  macro which evaluates stream more than
+       once.
+
+       putchar(c); is equivalent to putc(c,stdout).
+
+       puts() writes the string s and a trailing newline to  std-
+       out.
+
+       Calls  to  the  functions described here can be mixed with
+       each other and with calls to other output  functions  from
+       the stdio library for the same output stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fputc(), putc() and putchar() return the character written
+       as an unsigned char cast to an int or EOF on error.
+
+       puts() and fputs() return a non - negative number on  suc-
+       cess, or EOF on error.
+
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C, POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       It  is not advisable to mix calls to output functions from
+       the stdio library with low - level calls  to  write()  for
+       the  file  descriptor  associated  with  the  same  output
+       stream; the results will be undefined  and  very  probably
+       not what you want.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+write, +fopen, +fwrite, +scanf, +gets, +

+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
PUTS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             PUTS(3)
+

+
+       fseek(3), ferror(3)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fread.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fread.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d1808a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fread.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +fread + +
+
+
+
+
+
FREAD(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FREAD(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fread, fwrite - binary stream input/output
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int  fread(  void  *ptr,  size_t  size, size_t nmemb, FILE
+       *stream);
+
+       int fwrite( void *ptr, size_t  size,  size_t  nmemb,  FILE
+       *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The function fread reads nmemb elements of data, each size
+       bytes long, from the stream pointed to by stream,  storing
+       them at the location given by ptr.
+
+       The  function  fwrite  writes nmemb elements of data, each
+       size bytes long, to  the  stream  pointed  to  by  stream,
+       obtaining them from the location given by ptr.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fread  and  fwrite return the number of items successfully
+       read or written (i.e., not the number of characters).   If
+       an error occurs, or the end-of-file is reached, the return
+       value is a short item count (or zero).
+
+       fread does not distinguish between end-of-file and  error,
+       and  callers  must  use feof(3) and ferror(3) to determine
+       which occurred.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+feof, +ferror, +read, +write, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The functions fread and fwrite conform to ANSI C3.159-1989
+       (``ANSI C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE               20 April 1995                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/freopen.htm b/reference/C/MAN/freopen.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90133d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/freopen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +freopen + +
+
+
+
+
+
FOPEN(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FOPEN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fopen, fdopen, freopen - stream open functions
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       FILE *fopen( char *path, char *mode);
+       FILE *fdopen( int fildes, char *mode);
+       FILE *freopen( char *path, char *mode, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The fopen function opens the file whose name is the string
+       pointed to by path and associates a stream with it.
+
+       The argument mode points to a string beginning with one of
+       the  following sequences (Additional characters may follow
+       these sequences.):
+
+       r      Open text file for reading.  The  stream  is  posi-
+              tioned at the beginning of the file.
+
+       r+     Open  for reading and writing.  The stream is posi-
+              tioned at the beginning of the file.
+
+       w      Truncate file to zero length or  create  text  file
+              for  writing.   The  stream  is  positioned  at the
+              beginning of the file.
+
+       w+     Open for reading and writing.  The file is  created
+              if  it  does  not exist, otherwise it is truncated.
+              The stream is positioned at the  beginning  of  the
+              file.
+
+       a      Open  for  writing.  The file is created if it does
+              not exist.  The stream is positioned at the end  of
+              the file.
+
+       a+     Open  for reading and writing.  The file is created
+              if it does not exist.  The stream is positioned  at
+              the end of the file.
+
+       The  mode  string can also include the letter ``b'' either
+       as a third character or as a character between the charac-
+       ters  in any of the two-character strings described above.
+       This is strictly for compatibility with  ANSI  C3.159-1989
+       (``ANSI  C'')  and  has  no  effect; the ``b'' is ignored.
+       Linux may not behave this way.
+
+       Any      created      files      will      have       mode
+       S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR|S_IRGRP|S_IWGRP|S_IROTH|S_IWOTH (0666), as
+       modified by the process' umask value (see umask(2).
+
+       Reads and writes may be intermixed on  read/write  streams
+       in  any  order, and do not require an intermediate seek as
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
FOPEN(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FOPEN(3)
+

+
+       in previous versions of stdio.  This is  not  portable  to
+       other  systems,  however,  and  may  not  work under Linux
+       (someone should find out and fix  this  manpage);  ANSI  C
+       requires   that  a  file  positioning  function  intervene
+       between  output  and  input,  unless  an  input  operation
+       encounters end-of-file.
+
+       The  fdopen function associates a stream with the existing
+       file descriptor, fildes.  The mode of the stream  must  be
+       compatible with the mode of the file descriptor.
+
+       The  freopen  function  opens  the  file whose name is the
+       string pointed  to  by  path  and  associates  the  stream
+       pointed  to by stream with it.  The original stream (if it
+       exists) is closed.  The mode argument is used just  as  in
+       the  fopen function.  The primary use of the freopen func-
+       tion is to change the file associated with a standard text
+       stream (stderr, stdin, or stdout).
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       Upon  successful  completion  fopen,  fdopen  and  freopen
+       return a FILE pointer.  Otherwise, NULL  is  returned  and
+       the global variable errno is set to indicate the error.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINVAL The  mode provided to fopen, fdopen, or freopen was
+              invalid.
+
+       The fopen, fdopen and freopen functions may also fail  and
+       set  errno for any of the errors specified for the routine
+       malloc(3).
+
+       The fopen function may also fail and set errno for any  of
+       the errors specified for the routine open(2).
+
+       The fdopen function may also fail and set errno for any of
+       the errors specified for the routine fcntl(2).
+
+       The freopen function may also fail and set errno  for  any
+       of   the   errors  specified  for  the  routines  open(2),
+       fclose(3) and fflush(3).
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+open, +fclose, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fopen  and  freopen   functions   conform   to   ANSI
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').  The fdopen function conforms to
+       IEEE Std1003.1-1988 (``POSIX'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/frexp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/frexp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a81ecf --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/frexp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +frexp + +
+
+
+
+
+
FREXP(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FREXP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       frexp  -  convert  floating-point number to fractional and
+       integral components
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double frexp(double x, int *exp);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The frexp() function is used to split the number x into  a
+       normalized  fraction  and  an  exponent which is stored in
+       exp.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The frexp() function returns the normalized fraction.   If
+       the  argument  x is not zero, the normalized fraction is x
+       times a power of two, and  is  always  in  the  range  1/2
+       (inclusive) to 1 (exclusive).  If x is zero, then the nor-
+       malized fraction is zero and zero is stored in exp.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+, +modf, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        June 6, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fscanf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fscanf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..44ec43c --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fscanf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ +fscanf + +
+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       scanf,  fscanf,  sscanf,  vscanf, vsscanf, vfscanf - input
+       format conversion
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+       int scanf( const char *format, ...);
+       int fscanf( FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);
+       int sscanf( const char *str, const char *format, ...);
+
+       #include <stdarg.h>
+       int vscanf( const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vsscanf( const char *str, const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vfscanf( FILE *stream, const char *format, va_list ap);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The scanf family of functions scans input according  to  a
+       format  as  described below.  This format may contain con-
+       version specifiers; the results from such conversions,  if
+       any,  are stored through the pointer arguments.  The scanf
+       function reads input from the standard input stream stdin,
+       fscanf  reads  input  from  the stream pointer stream, and
+       sscanf reads its input from the character  string  pointed
+       to by str.
+
+       The vfscanf function is analogous to vfprintf(3) and reads
+       input from the stream  pointer  stream  using  a  variable
+       argument  list  of  pointers  (see  stdarg(3).  The vscanf
+       function scans a variable argument list from the  standard
+       input  and  the  vsscanf  function scans it from a string;
+       these are analogous to the vprintf and vsprintf  functions
+       respectively.
+
+       Each  successive pointer argument must correspond properly
+       with each successive conversion specifier (but  see  `sup-
+       pression' below).  All conversions are introduced by the %
+       (percent sign) character.  The format string may also con-
+       tain other characters.  White space (such as blanks, tabs,
+       or newlines) in the format  string  match  any  amount  of
+       white  space,  including  none,  in the input.  Everything
+       else matches only itself.  Scanning stops  when  an  input
+       character  does  not match such a format character.  Scan-
+       ning also stops when an input conversion  cannot  be  made
+       (see below).
+
+
CONVERSIONS
+
       Following  the  % character introducing a conversion there
+       may be a number of flag characters, as follows:
+
+       *      Suppresses assignment.  The conversion that follows
+              occurs as usual, but no pointer is used; the result
+              of the conversion is simply discarded.
+
+       h      Indicates that the conversion will be one of  dioux
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+              or  n  and the next pointer is a pointer to a short
+              int (rather than int).
+
+       l      Indicates either that the conversion will be one of
+              dioux  or  n and the next pointer is a pointer to a
+              long int (rather than int), or that the  conversion
+              will  be  one  of  efg  and  the  next pointer is a
+              pointer to double (rather than float).
+
+       L      Indicates that the conversion will be efg  and  the
+              next  pointer  is  a pointer to long double.  (This
+              type is not implemented; the L  flag  is  currently
+              ignored--this may not be true for Linux.)
+
+       In addition to these flags, there may be an optional maxi-
+       mum field width, expressed as a decimal  integer,  between
+       the % and the conversion.  If no width is given, a default
+       of `infinity' is used (with one exception, below);  other-
+       wise  at most this many characters are scanned in process-
+       ing the conversion.  Before conversion begins,  most  con-
+       versions skip white space; this white space is not counted
+       against the field width.
+
+       The following conversions are available:
+
+       %      Matches a literal `%'.  That is, `%%' in the format
+              string  matches  a  single input `%' character.  No
+              conversion is done, and assignment does not  occur.
+
+       d      Matches  an  optionally signed decimal integer; the
+              next pointer must be a pointer to int.
+
+       D      Equivalent to ld; this exists  only  for  backwards
+              compatibility.
+
+       i      Matches  an  optionally  signed  integer;  the next
+              pointer must be a pointer to int.  The  integer  is
+              read  in base 16 if it begins with `0x' or `0X', in
+              base 8 if it begins with `0', and in base 10 other-
+              wise.   Only characters that correspond to the base
+              are used.
+
+       o      Matches an octal integer; the next pointer must  be
+              a pointer to unsigned int.
+
+       O      Equivalent to lo; this exists for backwards compat-
+              ibility.
+
+       u      Matches an optionally signed decimal  integer;  the
+              next pointer must be a pointer to unsigned int.
+
+       x      Matches an optionally a signed hexadecimal integer;
+              the next pointer must be a pointer to unsigned int.
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+       X      Equivalent   to   lx;   this   violates   the  ANSI
+              C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'') but is backwards  compati-
+              ble  with  previous UNIX systems--I don't know what
+              Linux does with this.
+
+       f      Matches an optionally signed floating-point number;
+              the next pointer must be a pointer to float.
+
+       e      Equivalent to f.
+
+       g      Equivalent to f.
+
+       E      Equivalent   to   lf;   this   violates   the  ANSI
+              C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'') but is backwards  compati-
+              ble  with  previous UNIX systems--I don't know what
+              Linux does with this.
+
+       F      Equivalent to lf; this exists  only  for  backwards
+              compatibility.
+
+       s      Matches  a  sequence of non-white-space characters;
+              the next pointer must be a pointer to char, and the
+              array  must  be  large  enough  to  accept  all the
+              sequence and the terminating  NUL  character.   The
+              input string stops at white space or at the maximum
+              field width, whichever occurs first.
+
+       c      Matches  a  sequence  of  width  count   characters
+              (default  1); the next pointer must be a pointer to
+              char, and there must be enough  room  for  all  the
+              characters  (no  terminating  NUL  is  added).  The
+              usual skip of leading white  space  is  suppressed.
+              To skip white space first, use an explicit space in
+              the format.
+
+       [      Matches a nonempty sequence of characters from  the
+              specified  set  of  accepted  characters;  the next
+              pointer must be a pointer to char, and  there  must
+              be  enough  room  for  all  the  characters  in the
+              string, plus  a  terminating  NUL  character.   The
+              usual  skip  of  leading white space is suppressed.
+              The string is to be made up of  characters  in  (or
+              not in) a particular set; the set is defined by the
+              characters between the open bracket [ character and
+              a  close  bracket  ]  character.   The set excludes
+              those characters if the first character  after  the
+              open bracket is a circumflex ^.  To include a close
+              bracket in the set, make  it  the  first  character
+              after the open bracket or the circumflex; any other
+              position will end the set.  The hyphen character  -
+              is  also  special;  when  placed  between two other
+              characters, it adds all intervening  characters  to
+              the  set.   To  include  a hyphen, make it the last
+              character before  the  final  close  bracket.   For
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       3
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+              instance,  `[^]0-9-]'  means  the  set  `everything
+              except  close  bracket,  zero  through  nine,   and
+              hyphen'.   The string ends with the appearance of a
+              character not in the (or, with  a  circumflex,  in)
+              set or when the field width runs out.
+
+       p      Matches  a  pointer  value  (as  printed by `%p' in
+              printf(3); the next pointer must be  a  pointer  to
+              void.
+
+       n      Nothing is expected; instead, the number of charac-
+              ters consumed thus far from  the  input  is  stored
+              through  the  next pointer, which must be a pointer
+              to int.  This is not a conversion, although it  can
+              be suppressed with the * flag.
+
+       For  backwards  compatibility, other conversion characters
+       (except `\0') are taken as if they were `%d' or, if upper-
+       case, `%ld', and a `conversion' of `%\0' causes an immedi-
+       ate return of EOF.   The  F  and  X  conversions  will  be
+       changed in the future to conform to the
+        ANSI  C  standard,  after  which  they  will act like and
+       respectively.  The behavior of Linux on  the  non-standard
+       points is not known by this documenter.
+
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       These functions return the number of input items assigned,
+       which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the
+       event  of  a matching failure.  Zero indicates that, while
+       there was input available, no conversions  were  assigned;
+       typically  this is due to an invalid input character, such
+       as an alphabetic character for  a  `%d'  conversion.   The
+       value  EOF  is  returned if an input failure occurs before
+       any conversion such as an end-of-file occurs. If an  error
+       or end-of-file occurs after conversion has begun, the num-
+       ber of conversions which were  successfully  completed  is
+       returned.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+strtol, +strtoul, +strtod, +getc, +printf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  functions  fscanf,  scanf, and sscanf conform to ANSI
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
BUGS
+
       Differences for Linux are not known  at  this  time.   The
+       following is for the BSD version:
+
+       The current situation with %F and %X conversions is unfor-
+       tunate.
+
+       All of the backwards compatibility formats will be removed
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       4
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+       in the future.
+
+       Numerical  strings  are  truncated  to 512 characters; for
+       example, %f and %d are implicitly %512f and %512d.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       5
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fseek.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fseek.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..034354e --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fseek.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +fseek + +
+
+
+
+
+
FSEEK(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FSEEK(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fgetpos,  fseek,  fsetpos,  ftell,  rewind  - reposition a
+       stream
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fseek( FILE *stream, long offset, int whence);
+       long ftell( FILE *stream);
+       void rewind( FILE *stream);
+       int fgetpos( FILE *stream, fpos_t *pos);
+       int fsetpos( FILE *stream, fpos_t *pos);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The fseek function sets the file  position  indicator  for
+       the  stream  pointed to by stream.  The new position, mea-
+       sured in bytes, is obtained by adding offset bytes to  the
+       position  specified  by  whence.   If  whence  is  set  to
+       SEEK_SET, SEEK_CUR, or SEEK_END, the offset is relative to
+       the  start of the file, the current position indicator, or
+       end-of-file, respectively.  A successful call to the fseek
+       function  clears  the end-of-file indicator for the stream
+       and undoes any effects of the ungetc(3)  function  on  the
+       same stream.
+
+       The  ftell  function obtains the current value of the file
+       position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
+
+       The rewind function sets the file position  indicator  for
+       the  stream  pointed  to by stream to the beginning of the
+       file.  It is equivalent to:
+
+              (void)fseek(stream, 0L, SEEK_SET)
+
+       except that the error indicator for  the  stream  is  also
+       cleared (see clearerr(3).
+
+       The fgetpos and fsetpos functions are alternate interfaces
+       equivalent  to  ftell  and  fseek  (with  whence  set   to
+       SEEK_SET),  setting  and  storing the current value of the
+       file offset into or from the object referenced by pos.  On
+       some  non-UNIX  systems  an fpos_t object may be a complex
+       object and these routines may be the only way to  portably
+       reposition a text stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       The  rewind  function  returns  no value.  Upon successful
+       completion, fgetpos, fseek, fsetpos return  0,  and  ftell
+       returns the current offset.  Otherwise, -1 is returned and
+       the global variable errno is set to indicate the error.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  The stream specified is not a seekable stream.
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
FSEEK(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            FSEEK(3)
+

+
+       EINVAL The whence argument  to  fseek  was  not  SEEK_SET,
+              SEEK_END, or SEEK_CUR.
+
+       The  function  fgetpos, fseek, fsetpos, and ftell may also
+       fail and set errno for any of the errors specified for the
+       routines fflush(3), fstat(2), lseek(2), and malloc(3).
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+lseek, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fgetpos,  fsetpos, fseek, ftell, and rewind functions
+       conform to ANSI C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/fwrite.htm b/reference/C/MAN/fwrite.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..884ce25 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/fwrite.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +fwrite + +
+
+
+
+
+
WRITE(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            WRITE(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fread, fwrite - binary stream input/output
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int  fread(  void  *ptr,  size_t  size, size_t nmemb, FILE
+       *stream);
+
+       int fwrite( void *ptr, size_t  size,  size_t  nmemb,  FILE
+       *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The function fread reads nmemb elements of data, each size
+       bytes long, from the stream pointed to by stream,  storing
+       them at the location given by ptr.
+
+       The  function  fwrite  writes nmemb elements of data, each
+       size bytes long, to  the  stream  pointed  to  by  stream,
+       obtaining them from the location given by ptr.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fread  and  fwrite return the number of items successfully
+       read or written (i.e., not the number of characters).   If
+       an error occurs, or the end-of-file is reached, the return
+       value is a short item count (or zero).
+
+       fread does not distinguish between end-of-file and  error,
+       and  callers  must  use feof(3) and ferror(3) to determine
+       which occurred.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+feof, +ferror, +read, +write, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The functions fread and fwrite conform to ANSI C3.159-1989
+       (``ANSI C'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE               20 April 1995                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getc.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3437ed --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +getc + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETC(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             GETC(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fgetc, fgets, getc, getchar, gets, ungetc - input of char-
+       acters and strings
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fgetc(FILE *stream);
+       char *fgets(char *s, int size, FILE *stream);
+       int getc(FILE *stream);
+       int getchar(void);
+       char *gets(char *s);
+       int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       fgetc() reads the next character from stream  and  returns
+       it  as  an  unsigned char cast to an int, or EOF on end of
+       file or error.
+
+       getc() is equivalent to fgetc()  except  that  it  may  be
+       implemented  as  a  macro which evaluates stream more than
+       once.
+
+       getchar() is equivalent to getc(stdin).
+
+       gets() reads a line from stdin into the buffer pointed  to
+       by  s  until either a terminating newline or EOF, which it
+       replaces with '\0'.  No check for buffer overrun  is  per-
+       formed (see BUGS below).
+
+       fgets()  reads  in at most one less than n characters from
+       stream and stores them into the buffer pointed  to  by  s.
+       Reading  stops after an EOF or a newline.  If a newline is
+       read, it is stored into the  buffer.   A  '\0'  is  stored
+       after the last character in the buffer.
+
+       ungetc()  pushes  c back to stream, cast to unsigned char,
+       where it is  available  for  subsequent  read  operations.
+       Pushed  -  back  characters  will  be  returned in reverse
+       order; only one pushback is guaranteed.
+
+       Calls to the functions described here can  be  mixed  with
+       each  other  and  with calls to other input functions from
+       the stdio library for the same input stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fgetc(), getc() and getchar() return the character read as
+       an  unsigned  char cast to an int or EOF on end of file or
+       error.
+
+       gets() and fgets() return s on success, and NULL on end of
+       file or error.
+
+       ungetc() returns c on success, or EOF on error.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETC(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             GETC(3)
+

+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C, POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       Because  it is impossible to tell without knowing the data
+       in advance how  many  characters  gets()  will  read,  and
+       because  gets() will continue to store characters past the
+       end of the buffer, it is extremely dangerous to  use.   It
+       has  been  used  to  break computer security.  Use fgets()
+       instead.
+
+       It is not advisable to mix calls to input  functions  from
+       the stdio library with low - level calls to read() for the
+       file descriptor associated  with  the  input  stream;  the
+       results  will  be undefined and very probably not what you
+       want.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+read, +write, +fopen, +fread, +scanf, +puts, +fseek, +ferror, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getdid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getdid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d131cd --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getdid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +getgid + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETGID(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETGID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getgid, getegid - get group identity
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       gid_t getgid(void);
+       gid_t getegid(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       getgid returns the real group ID of the current process.
+
+       getegid returns the effective group ID of the current pro-
+       cess.
+
+       The real ID corresponds to the ID of the calling  process.
+       The effective ID corresponds to the set ID bit on the file
+       being executed.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       These functions are always successful.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+setregid, +setgid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.11              23 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getenv.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getenv.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4502275 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getenv.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +getenv + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETENV(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETENV(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getenv - get an environment variable
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       char *getenv(const char *name);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  getenv() function searches the environment list for a
+       string that matches the string pointed to  by  name.   The
+       strings are of the form name = value.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  getenv()  function  returns a pointer to the value in
+       the environment, or NULL if there is no match.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+putenv, +setenv, +unsetenv, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 3, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getgroupd.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getgroupd.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6cd339 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getgroupd.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +getgroups + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETGROUPS(2)        Linux Programmer's Manual        GETGROUPS(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getgroups, setgroups - get/set group access list
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int getgroups(int size, gid_t list[]);
+
+
+       #define __USE_BSD
+       #include <grp.h>
+
+       int setgroups(size_t size, const gid_t *list);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       getgroups
+              Up  to  size  supplemental  groups  are returned in
+              list.  If size is zero, list is not  modified,  but
+              the  total  number  of  supplemental groups for the
+              process is returned.
+
+       setgroups
+              Sets the supplemental groups for the process.  Only
+              the super-user may use this function.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       getgroups
+              On  success, the number of groups stored in list is
+              returned (if size is zero, however, the  number  of
+              supplemental  group IDs associated with the process
+              is returned).  On error, -1 is returned, and  errno
+              is set appropriately.
+
+       setgroups
+              On  success,  zero  is  returned.   On error, -1 is
+              returned, and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EFAULT list has an invalid address.
+
+       EPERM  For setgroups, the user is not the super-user.
+
+       EINVAL For setgroups, gidsetsize is greater  than  NGROUPS
+              (32 for Linux 0.99.11).
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       getgroups conforms to POSIX.1 (and is present in BSD 4.3).
+       Since setgroups requires  privilege,  it  is  not  covered
+       under POSIX.1.
+
+
BUGS
+
       The __USE_BSD flag probably shouldn't be required for set-
+       groups.
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.11              23 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETGROUPS(2)        Linux Programmer's Manual        GETGROUPS(2)
+

+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+initgroups, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.11              23 July 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/gethostname.htm b/reference/C/MAN/gethostname.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b5256c --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/gethostname.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +gethostname + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETHOSTNAME(2)      Linux Programmer's Manual      GETHOSTNAME(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       gethostname, sethostname - get/set host name
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int gethostname(char *name, size_t len);
+       int sethostname(const char *name, size_t len);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       These  functions  are used to access or to change the host
+       name of the current processor.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINVAL len  is negative or, for sethostname, len is larger
+              than the maximum allowed size, or, for  gethostname
+              on Linux/i386, len is smaller than the actual size.
+
+       EPERM  For sethostname, the caller was not the  superuser.
+
+       EFAULT name is an invalid address.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX.1  does  not  define  these  functions,  but ISO/IEC
+       9945-1:1990 mentions them in B.4.4.1.
+
+
BUGS
+
       Some other  implementations  of  gethostname  successfully
+       return len bytes even if name is longer.  Linux/Alpha com-
+       plies with this behaviour.  Linux/i386,  however,  returns
+       EINVAL in this case (as of DLL 4.6.27 libraries).
+
+
NOTES
+
       Under  Linux/Alpha,  gethostname  is a system call.  Under
+       Linux/i386, gethostname  is  implemented  at  the  library
+       level by calling uname(2).
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getdomainname, +setdomainname, +uname, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.3.6                22 July 1995                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getlogin.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getlogin.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6870731 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getlogin.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +getlogin + +
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getopt.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getopt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae24692 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getopt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,291 @@ +getopt + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETOPT(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETOPT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getopt - Read command line options
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[],
+                  const char *optstring);
+
+       extern char *optarg;
+       extern int optind, opterr, optopt;
+
+       #include <getopt.h>
+
+       int getopt_long(int argc, char * const argv[],
+                       const char *shortopts,
+                       const struct option *longopts, int longind);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  getopt()  function parses the command line arguments.
+       Its arguments argc and argv are  the  argument  count  and
+       array  as passed to the main() function on program invoca-
+       tion.  optstring is a list of available option characters.
+       If  such  a  character  is followed by a colon, the option
+       takes an argument, which is placed in optarg.
+
+       The external variable optind is  the  index  of  the  next
+       array  element  of argv[] to be processed; it communicates
+       from one call of getopt() to the  next  which  element  to
+       process.
+
+       The getopt_long() function works like getopt() except that
+       it also accepts long options, started out by  two  dashes.
+       If these take values, it is either in the form --arg=value
+       or --arg value.  It takes the  additional  arguments  lon-
+       gopts  which is a pointer to the first element of an array
+       of struct option declared in <getopt.h> as
+
+          struct option {
+              const char *name;
+              int has_arg;
+              int *flag;
+              int val;
+          };
+
+          The meaning of the different fields are:
+
+       name   is the name of the long option.
+
+       has_arg
+              is a boolean value which should be set  to  nonzero
+              if the long option takes a value.
+
+       flag   determines   the   return  value  if  getopt_long()
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 25, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETOPT(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETOPT(3)
+

+
+              returns a value for a long option; if  it  is  non-
+              zero,  zero is returned as a function value, other-
+              wise val.
+
+       val    determines the value to return if flag is zero.
+
+       The last element of  the  array  has  to  be  filled  with
+       zeroes.
+
+       The  option_index  points  to the index of the long option
+       relative to longopts.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The getopt() function returns the option character if  the
+       option  was found successfully, ':' if there was a missing
+       parameter for one of  the  options,  '?'  for  an  unknown
+       option character and -1 for the end of the option list.
+
+
EXAMPLE
+
       The  following  example  program,  from  the  source code,
+       illustrates the use of getopt_long() with most of its fea-
+       tures.
+
+       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int
+       main (argc, argv)
+            int argc;
+            char **argv;
+       {
+         int c;
+         int digit_optind = 0;
+
+         while (1)
+           {
+             int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1;
+             int option_index = 0;
+             static struct option long_options[] =
+             {
+            {"add", 1, 0, 0},
+            {"append", 0, 0, 0},
+            {"delete", 1, 0, 0},
+            {"verbose", 0, 0, 0},
+            {"create", 1, 0, 'c'},
+            {"file", 1, 0, 0},
+            {0, 0, 0, 0}
+             };
+
+             c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:012",
+                        long_options, &option_index);
+             if (c == -1)
+            break;
+
+             switch (c)
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 25, 1993                        2
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETOPT(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETOPT(3)
+

+
+            {
+            case 0:
+              printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name);
+              if (optarg)
+                printf (" with arg %s", optarg);
+              printf ("0);
+              break;
+
+            case '0':
+            case '1':
+            case '2':
+              if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind)
+                printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.0);
+              digit_optind = this_option_optind;
+              printf ("option %c0, c);
+              break;
+
+            case 'a':
+              printf ("option a0);
+              break;
+
+            case 'b':
+              printf ("option b0);
+              break;
+
+            case 'c':
+              printf ("option c with value `%s'0, optarg);
+              break;
+
+            case 'd':
+              printf ("option d with value `%s'0, optarg);
+              break;
+
+            case '?':
+              break;
+
+            default:
+              printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??0, c);
+            }
+           }
+
+         if (optind < argc)
+           {
+             printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: ");
+             while (optind < argc)
+            printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]);
+             printf ("0);
+           }
+
+         exit (0);
+       }
+
+
BUGS
+
       This manpage is confusing.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 25, 1993                        3
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETOPT(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETOPT(3)
+

+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       getopt() :
+              POSIX.1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 25, 1993                        4
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getpgrp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getpgrp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d56e00 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getpgrp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +getpgrp + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETPGID(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SETPGID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setpgid, getpgid, setpgrp, getpgrp - set/get process group
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int setpgid(pid_t pid, pid_t pgid);
+       pid_t getpgid(pid_t pid);
+       int setpgrp(void);
+       pid_t getpgrp(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setpgid sets the process group ID of the process specified
+       by  pid  to  pgid.   If pid is zero, the process ID of the
+       current process is used.  If pgid is zero, the process  ID
+       of the process specified by pid is used.
+
+       getpgid returns the process group ID of the process speci-
+       fied by pid.  If pid is zero, the process ID of  the  cur-
+       rent process is used.
+
+       In  the  Linux  DLL  4.4.1  library,  setpgrp simply calls
+       setpgid(0,0).
+
+       getpgrp is equivalent to getpgid(0).
+
+       Process groups are used for distribution of  signals,  and
+       by  terminals  to arbitrate requests for their input: pro-
+       cesses that have the same process group  as  the  terminal
+       are  foreground and may read, while others will block with
+       a signal if they attempt to read.
+
+       These calls are thus used by programs such  as  csh(1)  to
+       create  process  groups  in implementing job control.  The
+       TIOCGPGRP and TIOCSPGRP calls described in termios(4)  are
+       used to get/set the process group of the control terminal.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, setpgid and setpgrp return zero.  On error, -1
+       is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
+
+       getpgid  returns a process group on success.  On error, -1
+       is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
+
+       getpgrp always returns the current process group.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINVAL  pgid is less than 0.
+
+       EPERM   Various permission violations.
+
+       ESRCH   pid does not match any process.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.4               15 April 1995                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SETPGID(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SETPGID(2)
+

+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getuid, +setsid, +tcsetpgrp, +termios, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.4               15 April 1995                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getpid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getpid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..599adce --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getpid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +getpid + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETPID(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETPID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getpid, getppid - get process identification
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       pid_t getpid(void);
+       pid_t getppid(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       getpid  returns  the  process  ID  of the current process.
+       (This is often used by routines that generate unique  tem-
+       porary file names.)
+
+       getppid  returns  the process ID of the parent of the cur-
+       rent process.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX, BSD 4.3, SVID
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+exec, +fork, +kill, +mkstemp, +tmpnam, +tempnam, +tmpfile, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.11              23 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getpw.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getpw.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ed2735 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getpw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +getpw + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETPW(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            GETPW(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getpw - Re-construct password line entry
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <pwd.h>
+       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       int getpw(uid_t uid, char *buf);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The getpw() function re-constructs the password line entry
+       for the given  user  uid  uid  in  the  buffer  buf.   The
+       returned buffer contains a line of format
+
+              name:passwd:uid:gid:gecos:dir:shell
+
+       The passwd structure is defined in <pwd.h> as follows:
+
+              struct passwd {
+                      char    *pw_name;       /* user name */
+                      char    *pw_passwd;     /* user password */
+                      uid_t   pw_uid;         /* user id */
+                      gid_t   pw_gid;         /* group id */
+                      char    *pw_gecos;      /* real name */
+                      char    *pw_dir;        /* home directory */
+                      char    *pw_shell;      /* shell program */
+              };
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  getpw()  function  returns  0 on success, or -1 if an
+       error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ENOMEM Insufficient memory to allocate passwd structure.
+
+
FILES
+
       /etc/passwdpassword database file
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fgetpwent, +getpwent, +setpwent, +endpwent, +getpwuid, +putpwent, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 9, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getpwent.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getpwent.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac99174 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getpwent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +getpwent + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETPWENT(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         GETPWENT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getpwent, setpwent, endpwent - get password file entry
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <pwd.h>
+       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       struct passwd *getpwent(void);
+
+       void setpwent(void);
+
+       void endpwent(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  getpwent()  function returns a pointer to a structure
+       containing  the  broken  out  fields  of   a   line   from
+       /etc/passwd.   The  first time it is called it returns the
+       first entry; thereafter, it returns successive entries.
+
+       The setpwent() function rewinds the file  pointer  to  the
+       beginning of the /etc/passwd file.
+
+       The endpwent() function closes the /etc/passwd file.
+
+       The passwd structure is defined in <pwd.h> as follows:
+
+              struct passwd {
+                      char    *pw_name;       /* user name */
+                      char    *pw_passwd;     /* user password */
+                      uid_t   pw_uid;         /* user id */
+                      gid_t   pw_gid;         /* group id */
+                      char    *pw_gecos;      /* real name */
+                      char    *pw_dir;        /* home directory */
+                      char    *pw_shell;      /* shell program */
+              };
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  getpwent()  function returns the passwd structure, or
+       NULL if there are no more entries or an error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ENOMEM Insufficient memory to allocate passwd structure.
+
+
FILES
+
       /etc/passwdpassword database file
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fgetpwent, +getpwnam, +getpwuid, +getpw, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 9, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getpwnam.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getpwnam.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..98232e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getpwnam.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +getpwuid + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETPWNAM(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         GETPWNAM(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getpwnam, getpwuid - get password file entry
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <pwd.h>
+       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       struct passwd *getpwnam(const char * name);
+
+       struct passwd *getpwuid(uid_t uid);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  getpwnam()  function returns a pointer to a structure
+       containing  the  broken  out  fields  of   a   line   from
+       /etc/passwd for the entry that matches the user name name.
+
+       The getpwuid() function returns a pointer to  a  structure
+       containing   the   broken   out  fields  of  a  line  from
+       /etc/passwd for the entry that matches the user uid uid.
+
+       The passwd structure is defined in <pwd.h> as follows:
+
+              struct passwd {
+                      char    *pw_name;       /* user name */
+                      char    *pw_passwd;     /* user password */
+                      uid_t   pw_uid;         /* user id */
+                      gid_t   pw_gid;         /* group id */
+                      char    *pw_gecos;      /* real name */
+                      char    *pw_dir;        /* home directory */
+                      char    *pw_shell;      /* shell program */
+              };
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The getpwnam() and getpwuid() functions return the  passwd
+       structure,  or  NULL if the matching entry is not found or
+       an error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ENOMEM Insufficient memory to allocate passwd structure.
+
+
FILES
+
       /etc/passwdpassword database file
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fgetpwent, +getpwent, +setpwent, +endpwent, +getpw, +putpwent, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 9, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/gets.htm b/reference/C/MAN/gets.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54a79a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/gets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +ungetc + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             GETS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fgetc, fgets, getc, getchar, gets, ungetc - input of char-
+       acters and strings
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fgetc(FILE *stream);
+       char *fgets(char *s, int size, FILE *stream);
+       int getc(FILE *stream);
+       int getchar(void);
+       char *gets(char *s);
+       int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       fgetc() reads the next character from stream  and  returns
+       it  as  an  unsigned char cast to an int, or EOF on end of
+       file or error.
+
+       getc() is equivalent to fgetc()  except  that  it  may  be
+       implemented  as  a  macro which evaluates stream more than
+       once.
+
+       getchar() is equivalent to getc(stdin).
+
+       gets() reads a line from stdin into the buffer pointed  to
+       by  s  until either a terminating newline or EOF, which it
+       replaces with '\0'.  No check for buffer overrun  is  per-
+       formed (see BUGS below).
+
+       fgets()  reads  in at most one less than n characters from
+       stream and stores them into the buffer pointed  to  by  s.
+       Reading  stops after an EOF or a newline.  If a newline is
+       read, it is stored into the  buffer.   A  '\0'  is  stored
+       after the last character in the buffer.
+
+       ungetc()  pushes  c back to stream, cast to unsigned char,
+       where it is  available  for  subsequent  read  operations.
+       Pushed  -  back  characters  will  be  returned in reverse
+       order; only one pushback is guaranteed.
+
+       Calls to the functions described here can  be  mixed  with
+       each  other  and  with calls to other input functions from
+       the stdio library for the same input stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fgetc(), getc() and getchar() return the character read as
+       an  unsigned  char cast to an int or EOF on end of file or
+       error.
+
+       gets() and fgets() return s on success, and NULL on end of
+       file or error.
+
+       ungetc() returns c on success, or EOF on error.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             GETS(3)
+

+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C, POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       Because  it is impossible to tell without knowing the data
+       in advance how  many  characters  gets()  will  read,  and
+       because  gets() will continue to store characters past the
+       end of the buffer, it is extremely dangerous to  use.   It
+       has  been  used  to  break computer security.  Use fgets()
+       instead.
+
+       It is not advisable to mix calls to input  functions  from
+       the stdio library with low - level calls to read() for the
+       file descriptor associated  with  the  input  stream;  the
+       results  will  be undefined and very probably not what you
+       want.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+read, +write, +fopen, +fread, +scanf, +puts, +fseek, +ferror, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/getuid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/getuid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f76486f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/getuid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +getuid + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETUID(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           GETUID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       getuid, geteuid - get user identity
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       uid_t getuid(void);
+       uid_t geteuid(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       getuid returns the real user ID of the current process.
+
+       geteuid  returns the effective user ID of the current pro-
+       cess.
+
+       The real ID corresponds to the ID of the calling  process.
+       The effective ID corresponds to the set ID bit on the file
+       being executed.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       These functions are always successful.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+setreuid, +setuid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.11              23 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/index.htm b/reference/C/MAN/index.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e674e42 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/index.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +index + +
+
+
+
+
+
INDEX(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            INDEX(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       index, rindex - locate character in string
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       char *index(const char *s, int c);
+
+       char *rindex(const char *s, int c);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The index() function returns a pointer to the first occur-
+       rence of the character c in the string s.
+
+       The rindex() function returns a pointer to the last occur-
+       rence of the character c in the string s.
+
+       The  terminating NULL character is considered to be a part
+       of the strings.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The index() and rindex() functions return a pointer to the
+       matched character or NULL if the character is not found.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+memchr, +strchr, +strpbrk, +strrchr, +strsep, +strspn, +strstr, +strtok, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 12, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ioctl.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ioctl.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..23d58e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ioctl.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +ioctl + +
+
+
+
+
+
IOCTL(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            IOCTL(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       ioctl - control device
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+
+       int ioctl(int d, int request, ...)
+
+       [The  "third"  argument  is  traditionally char *argp, and
+       will be so named for this discussion.]
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  ioctl  function  manipulates  the  underlying  device
+       parameters  of special files.  In particular, many operat-
+       ing characteristics of character special files (e.g.  ter-
+       minals)  may be controlled with ioctl requests.  The argu-
+       ment d must be an open file descriptor.
+
+       An ioctl request has encoded in it whether the argument is
+       an  in  parameter  or  out  parameter, and the size of the
+       argument argp in bytes.  Macros and defines used in speci-
+       fying   an   ioctl   request   are  located  in  the  file
+       sys/ioctl.h.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  d is not a valid descriptor.
+
+       ENOTTY d  is  not  associated  with  a  character  special
+              device.
+
+       ENOTTY The specified request does not apply to the kind of
+              object that the descriptor d references.
+
+       EINVAL Request or argp is not valid.
+
+
HISTORY
+
       An ioctl function call appeared in Version 7 AT&T UNIX.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+execve, +fcntl, +mt, +sd, +tty, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD Man Page               23 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/isatty.htm b/reference/C/MAN/isatty.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6eb2682 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/isatty.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +isatty + +
+
+
+
+
+
ISATTY(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           ISATTY(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       isatty - does this descriptor refer to a terminal
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int isatty ( int desc );
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       returns  1  if  desc  is an open descriptor connected to a
+       terminal and 0 else.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fstat, +ttyname, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                     April 20, 1995                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/labs.htm b/reference/C/MAN/labs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41e95e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/labs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +labs + +
+
+
+
+
+
LABS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             LABS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       labs - computes the absolute value of a long integer.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       long int labs(long int j);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  labs()  function  computes  the absolute value of the
+       long integer argument j.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       Returns the absolute value of the long integer argument.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
NOTES
+
       Trying to take the absolute value  of  the  most  negative
+       integer is not defined.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+abs, +ceil, +floor, +fabs, +rint, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        June 6, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ldexp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ldexp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7429a5a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ldexp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +ldexp + +
+
+
+
+
+
LDEXP(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            LDEXP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       ldexp  -  multiply floating-point number by integral power
+       of 2
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double ldexp(double x, int exp);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The ldexp() function returns the result of multiplying the
+       floating-point number x by 2 raised to the power exp.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+frexp, +modf, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD                        June 6, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ldiv.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ldiv.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c7d4818 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ldiv.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +ldiv + +
+
+
+
+
+
LDIV(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             LDIV(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       ldiv - computes the quotient and remainder of long integer
+       division.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       ldiv_t ldiv(long int numer, long int denom);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The ldiv() function computes  the  value  numer/denom  and
+       returns  the  quotient  and remainder in a structure named
+       ldiv_t that contains two long integer members  named  quot
+       and rem.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The ldiv_t structure.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+div, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 29, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/link.htm b/reference/C/MAN/link.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6009720 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/link.htm @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +link + +
+
+
+
+
+
LINK(2)             Linux Programmer's Manual             LINK(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       link - make a new name for a file
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int link(const char *oldpath, const char *newpath);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       link  creates a new link (also known as a hard link) to an
+       existing file.
+
+       If newpath exists it will not be overwritten.
+
+       This new name may be used exactly as the old one  for  any
+       operation;  both names refer to the same file (and so have
+       the same permissions and ownership) and it  is  impossible
+       to tell which name was the `original'.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EXDEV   oldpath and newpath are not on the  same  filesys-
+               tem.
+
+       EPERM   The filesystem containing oldpath and newpath does
+               not support the creation of hard links.
+
+       EFAULT  oldpath or newpath points outside your  accessible
+               address space.
+
+       EACCES  Write  access  to the directory containing newpath
+               is not allowed for the process's effective uid, or
+               one  of  the directories in oldpath or newpath did
+               not allow search (execute) permission.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               oldpath or newpath was too long.
+
+       ENOENT  A directory component in oldpath  or  newpath does
+               not exist or is a dangling symbolic link.
+
+       ENOTDIR A component used as a directory in oldpath or new-
+               path is not, in fact, a directory.
+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       EROFS   The file is on a read-only filesystem.
+
+       EEXIST  newpath already exists.
+
+       EMLINK  The file referred to by oldpath  already  has  the
+
+
+
+
Linux                     17 August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
LINK(2)             Linux Programmer's Manual             LINK(2)
+

+
+               maximum number of links to it.
+
+       ELOOP   oldpath  or newpath contains a reference to a cir-
+               cular symbolic link,  ie  a  symbolic  link  whose
+               expansion contains a reference to itself.
+
+       ENOSPC  The device containing the file has no room for the
+               new directory entry.
+
+       EPERM   oldpath is the .  or  ..  entry of a directory.
+
+
NOTES
+
       Hard links, as created by link, cannot  span  filesystems.
+       Use symlink if this is required.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
BUGS
+
       On  NFS file systems, the return code may be wrong in case
+       the NFS server performs the link creation and dies  before
+       it  can  say  so.  Use stat(2) to find out if the link got
+       created.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+symlink, +unlink, +rename, +open, +stat, +ln, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                     17 August 1994                        2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/longjmp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/longjmp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba1bbb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/longjmp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +longjmp + +
+
+
+
+
+
LONGJMP(3)              Library functions              LONGJMP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       longjmp - non-local jump to a saved stack context
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <setjmp.h>
+
+       void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       longjmp() and setjmp(3) are useful for dealing with errors
+       and interrupts encountered in a low-level subroutine of  a
+       program.   longjmp() restores the environment saved by the
+       last call of setjmp() with the corresponding env argument.
+       After  longjmp() is completed, program execution continues
+       as if the corresponding call of setjmp() had just returned
+       the  value  val.  longjmp() cannot cause 0 to be returned.
+       If longjmp is invoked with a second argument of 0, 1  will
+       be returned instead.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       This function never returns.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX
+
+
NOTES
+
       POSIX  does  not  specify  if  the  signal context will be
+       restored or not.  If  you  want  to  save  restore  signal
+       masks,  use siglongjmp(3) longjmp() makes programs hard to
+       understand  and  maintain.   If  possible  an  alternative
+       should be used.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+setjmp, +sigsetjmp, +siglongjmp, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                        November 25, 1994                       1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/lseek.htm b/reference/C/MAN/lseek.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..993137b --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/lseek.htm @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +lseek + +
+
+
+
+
+
LSEEK(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            LSEEK(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       lseek - reposition read/write file offset
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       off_t lseek(int fildes, off_t offset, int whence);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  lseek  function  repositions  the  offset of the file
+       descriptor fildes to the argument offset according to  the
+       directive  whence.   The  argument  fildes must be an open
+       file  descriptor.   Lseek  repositions  the  file  pointer
+       fildes as follows:
+
+              If  whence is SEEK_SET, the offset is set to offset
+              bytes.
+
+              If whence is SEEK_CUR, the offset  is  set  to  its
+              current location plus offset bytes.
+
+              If  whence  is  SEEK_END,  the offset is set to the
+              size of the file plus offset bytes.
+
+       The lseek function allows the file offset to be set beyond
+       the  end  of the existing end-of-file of the file. If data
+       is later written at this point, subsequent  reads  of  the
+       data in the gap return bytes of zeros (until data is actu-
+       ally written into the gap).
+
+       Some devices are incapable of seeking.  The value  of  the
+       pointer associated with such a device is undefined.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       Upon  successful  completion,  lseek returns the resulting
+       offset location as measured in bytes from the beginning of
+       the  file.  Otherwise, a value of -1 is returned and errno
+       is set to indicate the error.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  Fildes is not an open file descriptor.
+
+       ESPIPE Fildes is associated with a pipe, socket, or  FIFO.
+
+       EINVAL Whence is not a proper value.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
BUGS
+
       This  document's  use  of whence is incorrect English, but
+       maintained for historical reasons.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.9                10 June 1995                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
LSEEK(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            LSEEK(2)
+

+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+dup, +open, +fseek, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.9                10 June 1995                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/mblen.htm b/reference/C/MAN/mblen.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed12a75 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/mblen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +mblen + +
+
+
+
+
+
MBLEN(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            MBLEN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       mblen - determine the number of bytes in a character
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The mblen() function scans the first n bytes of the string
+       s and returns the number of bytes  in  a  character.   The
+       mblen() function is equivalent to
+
+              mbtowc((wchat_t *)0, s, n);
+
+       except  that  the  shift state of the mbtowc() function is
+       not affected.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The mblen() returns the number of bytes in a character  or
+       -1 if the character is invalid or 0 if s is a NULL string.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mbstowcs, +mbtowc, +wcstombs, +wctomb, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 29, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/mbstowcs.htm b/reference/C/MAN/mbstowcs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5345a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/mbstowcs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +mbstowcs + +
+
+
+
+
+
MBSTOWCS(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         MBSTOWCS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       mbstowcs  - convert a multibyte string to a wide character
+       string.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t *pwcs, const char *s, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The mbstowcs() function converts a sequence  of  multibyte
+       characters  from the array s into a sequence of wide char-
+       acters and stores up to n wide  characters  in  the  array
+       pwcs.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       mbstowcs() returns the number of wide characters stored or
+       -1 if s contains an invalid multibyte character.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mblen, +mbtowc, +wcstombs, +wctomb, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 29, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/mbtowc.htm b/reference/C/MAN/mbtowc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df98bb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/mbtowc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +mbtowc + +
+
+
+
+
+
MBTOWC(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MBTOWC(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       mbtowc  -  convert a multibyte character to a wide charac-
+       ter.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int mbtowc(wchar_t *pwc, const char *s, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The mbtowc() function converts a  multibyte  character  s,
+       which  is  no  longer  than n bytes, into a wide character
+       and, if pwc is not NULL, stores the wide character in pwc.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       mbtowc()  returns  the  number  of  bytes in the multibyte
+       character or -1 if the multibyte character is not valid.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mblen, +mbstowcs, +wcstombs, +wctomb, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 29, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/memchr.htm b/reference/C/MAN/memchr.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c5148f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/memchr.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +memchr + +
+
+
+
+
+
MEMCHR(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MEMCHR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       memchr - scan memory for a character
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       void *memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  memchr() function scans the first n bytes of the mem-
+       ory area pointed to by s for the character c.   The  first
+       byte  to  match  c  (interpreted as an unsigned character)
+       stops the operation.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The memchr() function returns a pointer  to  the  matching
+       byte  or NULL if the character does not occur in the given
+       memory area.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+index, +rindex, +strchr, +strpbrk, +strrchr, +strsep, +strspn, +strstr, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 12, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/memcmp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/memcmp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e4e991 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/memcmp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +memcmp + +
+
+
+
+
+
MEMCMP(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MEMCMP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       memcmp - compare memory areas
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  memcmp()  function  compares the first n bytes of the
+       memory areas s1 and s2.  It returns an integer less  than,
+       equal  to,  or  greater  than zero if s1 is found, respec-
+       tively, to be less than, to match, or be greater than  s2.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  memcmp() function returns an integer less than, equal
+       to, or greater than zero if the first n  bytes  of  s1  is
+       found,  respectively,  to  be  less  than, to match, or be
+       greater than the first n bytes of s2.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bcmp, +strcasecmp, +strcmp, +strcoll, +strncmp, +strncasecmp, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          April 10, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/memcpy.htm b/reference/C/MAN/memcpy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae7a1a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/memcpy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +memcpy + +
+
+
+
+
+
MEMCPY(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MEMCPY(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       memcpy - copy memory area
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       void *memcpy(void *dest, const void *src, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  memcpy() function copies n bytes from memory area src
+       to memory area dest.  The memory areas  may  not  overlap.
+       Use memmove(3) if the memory areas do overlap.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The memcpy() function returns a pointer to dest.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bcopy, +memccpy, +memmove, +strcpy, +strncpy, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 10, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/memmove.htm b/reference/C/MAN/memmove.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a0dc1bb --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/memmove.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +memmove + +
+
+
+
+
+
MEMMOVE(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          MEMMOVE(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       memmove - copy memory area
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       void *memmove(void *dest, const void *src, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The memmove() function copies n bytes from memory area src
+       to memory area dest.  The memory areas may overlap.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The memmove() function returns a pointer to dest.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bcopy, +memccpy, +memcpy, +strcpy, +strncpy, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 10, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/memset.htm b/reference/C/MAN/memset.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4276ef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/memset.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +memset + +
+
+
+
+
+
MEMSET(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MEMSET(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       memset - fill memory with a constant byte
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  memset() function fills the first n bytes of the mem-
+       ory area pointed to be s with the constant byte c.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The memset() function returns a pointer to the memory area
+       s.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bzero, +swab, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 11, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/mkdir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/mkdir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ac0bc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/mkdir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +mkdir + +
+
+
+
+
+
MKDIR(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            MKDIR(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       mkdir - create a directory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/types.h>
+       #include <fcntl.h>
+       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int mkdir(const char *pathname, mode_t mode);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       mkdir attempts to create a directory named pathname.
+
+       mode  specifies  the permissions to use. It is modified by
+       the process's umask in the usual way: the  permissions  of
+       the created file are (mode & ~umask).
+
+       The newly created directory will be owned by the effective
+       uid of the process.  If the directory containing the  file
+       has  the  set  group  id  bit set, or if the filesystem is
+       mounted with BSD group semantics, the new  directory  will
+       inherit  the group ownership from its parent; otherwise it
+       will be owned by the effective gid of the process.
+
+       If the parent directory has the set group id bit set  then
+       so will the newly created directory.
+
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       mkdir  returns zero on success, or -1 if an error occurred
+       (in which case, errno is set appropriately).
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EEXIST pathname  already  exists  (not  necessarily  as  a
+              directory).
+
+       EFAULT pathname  points  outside  your  accessible address
+              space.
+
+       EACCES The parent directory does not allow  write  permis-
+              sion  to  the process, or one of the directories in
+              pathname did not allow search (execute) permission.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+              pathname was too long.
+
+       ENOENT A directory component in pathname does not exist or
+              is a dangling symbolic link.
+
+       ENOTDIR
+              A component used as a directory in pathname is not,
+              in fact, a directory.
+
+       ENOMEM Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.0                 29 March 1994                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
MKDIR(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            MKDIR(2)
+

+
+       EROFS  pathname refers to a file on a read-only filesystem
+              and write access was requested.
+
+       ELOOP  pathname contains a reference to  a  circular  sym-
+              bolic link, ie a symbolic link whose expansion con-
+              tains a reference to itself.
+
+       ENOSPC The device containing pathname has no room for  the
+              new  directory.  ENOSPC The new directory cannot be
+              created because the user's disk quota is exhausted.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
BUGS
+
       In some older versions of Linux (for example, 0.99pl7) all
+       the normal filesystems sometime allow the creation of  two
+       files  in  the  same  directory  with the same name.  This
+       occurs only rarely and only on a  heavily  loaded  system.
+       It  is  believed  that  this  bug  was  fixed in the Minix
+       filesystem in Linux 0.99pl8 pre-release; and it  is  hoped
+       that  it was fixed in the other filesystems shortly after-
+       wards.
+
+       There are many infelicities  in  the  protocol  underlying
+       NFS.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+read, +write, +fcntl, +close, +unlink, +open, +mknod, +stat, +umask, +mount, +socket, +socket, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.0                 29 March 1994                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/modf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/modf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a17a355 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/modf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +modf + +
+
+
+
+
+
MODF(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             MODF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       modf  - extract signed integral and fractional values from
+       floating-point number
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double modf(double x, double *iptr);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The modf() function breaks the argument x into an integral
+       part  and  a  fractional  part, each of which has the same
+       sign as x.  The integral part is stored in iptr.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The modf() function returns the fractional part of x.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+frexp, +, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 6, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/opendir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/opendir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..227c03f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/opendir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +opendir + +
+
+
+
+
+
OPENDIR(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          OPENDIR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       opendir - open a directory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       #include <dirent.h>
+
+       DIR *opendir(const char *name);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  opendir()  function  opens  a directory stream corre-
+       sponding to the directory name, and returns a  pointer  to
+       the  directory  stream.   The  stream is positioned at the
+       first entry in the directory.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The opendir() function returns a pointer to the  directory
+       stream or NULL if an error occurred.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EACESS Permission denied.
+
+       EMFILE Too many file descriptors in use by process.
+
+       ENFILE Too many files are currently open in the system.
+
+       ENOENT Directory  does  not  exist,  or  name  is an empty
+              string.
+
+       ENOMEM Insufficient memory to complete the operation.
+
+       ENOTDIR
+              name is not a directory.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+open, +readdir, +closedir, +rewinddir, +seekdir, +telldir, +scandir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           11 June 1995                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/pause.htm b/reference/C/MAN/pause.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..82ffc2a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/pause.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +pause + +
+
+
+
+
+
PAUSE(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            PAUSE(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       pause - wait for signal
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include<unistd.h>
+
+       int pause(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       pause  causes  the  process  to  sleep  until  a signal is
+       received.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       pause always returns -1, and errno is set  to  ERESTARTNO-
+       HAND.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINTR   signal was received.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+kill, +select, +signal, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                     March 28, 1992                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/perlembed.htm b/reference/C/MAN/perlembed.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2609362 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/perlembed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,885 @@ +perlembed + +
+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       perlembed - how to embed perl in your C program
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       PREAMBLE
+
+       Do you want to:
+
+       Use C from Perl?
+            Read the perlcall manpage and the perlxs manpage.
+
+       Use a UNIX program from Perl?
+            Read about backquotes and the system entry in the
+            perlfunc manpage and the exec entry in the perlfunc
+            manpage.
+
+       Use Perl from Perl?
+            Read about the do entry in the perlfunc manpage and
+            the eval entry in the perlfunc manpage and the use
+            entry in the perlmod manpage and the require entry in
+            the perlmod manpage.
+
+       Use C from C?
+            Rethink your design.
+
+       Use Perl from C?
+            Read on...
+
+       ROADMAP
+
+       the section on Compiling your C program
+
+       There's one example in each of the five sections:
+
+       the section on Adding a Perl interpreter to your C program
+
+       the section on Calling a Perl subroutine from your C
+       program
+
+       the section on Evaluating a Perl statement from your C
+       program
+
+       the section on Performing Perl pattern matches and
+       substitutions from your C program
+
+       the section on Fiddling with the Perl stack from your C
+       program
+
+       This documentation is UNIX specific.
+
+       Compiling your C program
+
+       Every C program that uses Perl must link in the perl
+       library.
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+       What's that, you ask?  Perl is itself written in C; the
+       perl library is the collection of compiled C programs that
+       were used to create your perl executable (/usr/bin/perl or
+       equivalent).  (Corollary: you can't use Perl from your C
+       program unless Perl has been compiled on your machine, or
+       installed properly--that's why you shouldn't blithely copy
+       Perl executables from machine to machine without also
+       copying the lib directory.)
+
+       Your C program will--usually--allocate, "run", and
+       deallocate a PerlInterpreter object, which is defined in
+       the perl library.
+
+       If your copy of Perl is recent enough to contain this
+       documentation (5.002 or later), then the perl library (and
+       EXTERN.h and perl.h, which you'll also need) will reside
+       in a directory resembling this:
+
+           /usr/local/lib/perl5/your_architecture_here/CORE
+
+       or perhaps just
+
+           /usr/local/lib/perl5/CORE
+
+       or maybe something like
+
+           /usr/opt/perl5/CORE
+
+       Execute this statement for a hint about where to find
+       CORE:
+
+           perl -e 'use Config; print $Config{archlib}'
+
+       Here's how you might compile the example in the next
+       section, the section on Adding a Perl interpreter to your
+       C program, on a DEC Alpha running the OSF operating
+       system:
+
+           % cc -o interp interp.c -L/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE
+           -I/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE -lperl -lm
+
+       You'll have to choose the appropriate compiler (cc, gcc,
+       et al.)  and library directory (/usr/local/lib/...)  for
+       your machine.  If your compiler complains that certain
+       functions are undefined, or that it can't locate -lperl,
+       then you need to change the path following the -L.  If it
+       complains that it can't find EXTERN.h or perl.h, you need
+       to change the path following the -I.
+
+       You may have to add extra libraries as well.  Which ones?
+       Perhaps those printed by
+
+          perl -e 'use Config; print $Config{libs}'
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        2
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+       Adding a Perl interpreter to youur C program
+
+       In a sense, perl (the C program) is a good example of
+       embedding Perl (the language), so I'll demonstrate
+       embedding with miniperlmain.c, from the source
+       distribution.  Here's a bastardized, non-portable version
+       of miniperlmain.c containing the essentials of embedding:
+
+           #include <stdio.h>
+           #include <EXTERN.h>               /* from the Perl distribution     */
+           #include <perl.h>                 /* from the Perl distribution     */
+
+           static PerlInterpreter *my_perl;  /***    The Perl interpreter    ***/
+
+           int main(int argc, char **argv, char **env)
+           {
+               my_perl = perl_alloc();
+               perl_construct(my_perl);
+               perl_parse(my_perl, NULL, argc, argv, env);
+               perl_run(my_perl);
+               perl_destruct(my_perl);
+               perl_free(my_perl);
+           }
+
+       Now compile this program (I'll call it interp.c) into an
+       executable:
+
+           % cc -o interp interp.c -L/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE
+           -I/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE -lperl -lm
+
+       After a successful compilation, you'll be able to use
+       interp just like perl itself:
+
+           % interp
+           print "Pretty Good Perl \n";
+           print "10890 - 9801 is ", 10890 - 9801;
+           <CTRL-D>
+           Pretty Good Perl
+           10890 - 9801 is 1089
+
+       or
+
+           % interp -e 'printf("%x", 3735928559)'
+           deadbeef
+
+       You can also read and execute Perl statements from a file
+       while in the midst of your C program, by placing the
+       filename in argv[1] before calling perl_run().
+
+       Calling a Perl subroutine from yyour C program
+
+       To call individual Perl subroutines, you'll need to remove
+       the call to perl_run() and replace it with a call to
+       perl_call_argv().
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        3
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+       That's shown below, in a program I'll call showtime.c.
+
+           #include <stdio.h>
+           #include <EXTERN.h>
+           #include <perl.h>
+
+           static PerlInterpreter *my_perl;
+
+           int main(int argc, char **argv, char **env)
+           {
+               my_perl = perl_alloc();
+               perl_construct(my_perl);
+
+               perl_parse(my_perl, NULL, argc, argv, env);
+
+                                            /*** This replaces perl_run() ***/
+               perl_call_argv("showtime", G_DISCARD | G_NOARGS, argv);
+               perl_destruct(my_perl);
+               perl_free(my_perl);
+           }
+
+       where showtime is a Perl subroutine that takes no
+       arguments (that's the G_NOARGS) and for which I'll ignore
+       the return value (that's the G_DISCARD).  Those flags, and
+       others, are discussed in the perlcall manpage.
+
+       I'll define the showtime subroutine in a file called
+       showtime.pl:
+
+           print "I shan't be printed.";
+
+           sub showtime {
+               print time;
+           }
+
+       Simple enough.  Now compile and run:
+
+           % cc -o showtime showtime.c -L/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE
+           -I/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE -lperl -lm
+
+           % showtime showtime.pl
+           818284590
+
+       yielding the number of seconds that elapsed between
+       January 1, 1970 (the beginning of the UNIX epoch), and the
+       moment I began writing this sentence.
+
+       If you want to pass some arguments to the Perl subroutine,
+       or you want to access the return value, you'll need to
+       manipulate the Perl stack, demonstrated in the last
+       section of this document: the section on Fiddling with the
+       Perl stack from your C program
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        4
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+       Evaluating a Perl statement fr
om your C program
+

+       NOTE: This section, and the next, employ some very brittle
+       techniques for evaluting strings of Perl code.  Perl 5.002
+       contains some nifty features that enable A Better Way
+       (such as with the perl_eval_sv entry in the perlguts
+       manpage).  Look for updates to this document soon.
+
+       One way to evaluate a Perl string is to define a function
+       (we'll call ours perl_eval()) that wraps around Perl's the
+       eval entry in the perlfunc manpage.
+
+       Arguably, this is the only routine you'll ever need to
+       execute snippets of Perl code from within your C program.
+       Your string can be as long as you wish; it can contain
+       multiple statements; it can use the require entry in the
+       perlmod manpage or the do entry in the perlfunc manpage to
+       include external Perl files.
+
+       Our perl_eval() lets us evaluate individual Perl strings,
+       and then extract variables for coercion into C types.  The
+       following program, string.c, executes three Perl strings,
+       extracting an int from the first, a float from the second,
+       and a char * from the third.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        5
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+          #include <stdio.h>
+          #include <EXTERN.h>
+          #include <perl.h>
+
+          static PerlInterpreter *my_perl;
+
+          int perl_eval(char *string)
+          {
+            char *argv[2];
+            argv[0] = string;
+            argv[1] = NULL;
+            perl_call_argv("_eval_", 0, argv);
+          }
+
+          main (int argc, char **argv, char **env)
+          {
+            char *embedding[] = { "", "-e", "sub _eval_ { eval $_[0] }" };
+            STRLEN length;
+
+            my_perl = perl_alloc();
+            perl_construct( my_perl );
+
+            perl_parse(my_perl, NULL, 3, embedding, env);
+
+                                              /** Treat $a as an integer **/
+            perl_eval("$a = 3; $a **= 2");
+            printf("a = %d\n", SvIV(perl_get_sv("a", FALSE)));
+
+                                              /** Treat $a as a float **/
+            perl_eval("$a = 3.14; $a **= 2");
+            printf("a = %f\n", SvNV(perl_get_sv("a", FALSE)));
+
+                                              /** Treat $a as a string **/
+            perl_eval("$a = 'rekcaH lreP rehtonA tsuJ'; $a = reverse($a); ");
+            printf("a = %s\n", SvPV(perl_get_sv("a", FALSE), length));
+
+            perl_destruct(my_perl);
+            perl_free(my_perl);
+          }
+
+       All of those strange functions with sv in their names help
+       convert Perl scalars to C types.  They're described in the
+       perlguts manpage.
+
+       If you compile and run string.c, you'll see the results of
+       using SvIV() to create an int, SvNV() to create a float,
+       and SvPV() to create a string:
+
+          a = 9
+          a = 9.859600
+          a = Just Another Perl Hacker
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        6
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+       Performing Perl pattern matche
s and substitutions from
+
       your C program
+
+       Our perl_eval() lets us evaluate strings of Perl code, so
+       we can define some functions that use it to "specialize"
+       in matches and substitutions: match(), substitute(), and
+       matches().
+
+          char match(char *string, char *pattern);
+
+       Given a string and a pattern (e.g. "m/clasp/" or
+       "/\b\w*\b/", which in your program might be represented as
+       "/\\b\\w*\\b/"), returns 1 if the string matches the
+       pattern and 0 otherwise.
+
+          int substitute(char *string[], char *pattern);
+
+       Given a pointer to a string and an "=~" operation (e.g.
+       "s/bob/robert/g" or "tr[A-Z][a-z]"), modifies the string
+       according to the operation, returning the number of
+       substitutions made.
+
+          int matches(char *string, char *pattern, char **matches[]);
+
+       Given a string, a pattern, and a pointer to an empty array
+       of strings, evaluates $string =~ $pattern in an array
+       context, and fills in matches with the array elements
+       (allocating memory as it does so), returning the number of
+       matches found.
+
+       Here's a sample program, match.c, that uses all three:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        7
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+          #include <stdio.h>
+          #include <EXTERN.h>
+          #include <perl.h>
+
+          static PerlInterpreter *my_perl;
+
+          int eval(char *string)
+          {
+            char *argv[2];
+            argv[0] = string;
+            argv[1] = NULL;
+            perl_call_argv("_eval_", 0, argv);
+          }
+
+          /** match(string, pattern)
+           **
+           ** Used for matches in a scalar context.
+           **
+           ** Returns 1 if the match was successful; 0 otherwise.
+           **/
+          char match(char *string, char *pattern)
+          {
+            char *command;
+            command = malloc(sizeof(char) * strlen(string) + strlen(pattern) + 37);
+            sprintf(command, "$string = '%s'; $return = $string =~ %s",
+               string, pattern);
+            perl_eval(command);
+            free(command);
+            return SvIV(perl_get_sv("return", FALSE));
+          }
+
+          /** substitute(string, pattern)
+           **
+           ** Used for =~ operations that modify their left-hand side (s/// and tr///)
+           **
+           ** Returns the number of successful matches, and
+           ** modifies the input string if there were any.
+           **/
+          int substitute(char *string[], char *pattern)
+          {
+            char *command;
+            STRLEN length;
+            command = malloc(sizeof(char) * strlen(*string) + strlen(pattern) + 35);
+            sprintf(command, "$string = '%s'; $ret = ($string =~ %s)",
+               *string, pattern);
+            perl_eval(command);
+            free(command);
+            *string = SvPV(perl_get_sv("string", FALSE), length);
+            return SvIV(perl_get_sv("ret", FALSE));
+          }
+
+          /** matches(string, pattern, matches)
+           **
+           ** Used for matches in an array context.
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        8
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+           **
+           ** Returns the number of matches,
+           ** and fills in **matches with the matching substrings (allocates memory!)
+           **/
+          int matches(char *string, char *pattern, char **matches[])
+          {
+            char *command;
+            SV *current_match;
+            AV *array;
+            I32 num_matches;
+            STRLEN length;
+            int i;
+
+            command = malloc(sizeof(char) * strlen(string) + strlen(pattern) + 38);
+            sprintf(command, "$string = '%s'; @array = ($string =~ %s)",
+               string, pattern);
+            perl_eval(command);
+            free(command);
+            array = perl_get_av("array", FALSE);
+            num_matches = av_len(array) + 1; /** assume $[ is 0 **/
+            *matches = (char **) malloc(sizeof(char *) * num_matches);
+            for (i = 0; i <= num_matches; i++) {
+              current_match = av_shift(array);
+              (*matches)[i] = SvPV(current_match, length);
+            }
+            return num_matches;
+          }
+
+          main (int argc, char **argv, char **env)
+          {
+            char *embedding[] = { "", "-e", "sub _eval_ { eval $_[0] }" };
+            char *text, **matches;
+            int num_matches, i;
+            int j;
+
+            my_perl = perl_alloc();
+            perl_construct( my_perl );
+
+            perl_parse(my_perl, NULL, 3, embedding, env);
+
+            text = (char *) malloc(sizeof(char) * 486); /** A long string follows! **/
+            sprintf(text, "%s", "When he is at a convenience store and the bill comes to some amount like 76 cents, Maynard is aware that there is something he *should* do, something that will enable him to get back a quarter, but he has no idea *what*.  He fumbles through his red squeezey changepurse and gives the boy three extra pennies with his dollar, hoping that he might luck into the corre
ct amount.  The boy gives him back two of his own pennies and then the big shiny quarter that is his prize. -RICHH");
+

+            if (perl_match(text, "m/quarter/")) /** Does text contain 'quarter'? **/
+              printf("perl_match: Text contains the word 'quarter'.\n\n");
+            else
+              printf("perl_match: Text doesn't contain the word 'quarter'.\n\n");
+
+            if (perl_match(text, "m/eighth/")) /** Does text contain 'eighth'? **/
+              printf("perl_match: Text contains the word 'eighth'.\n\n");
+            else
+              printf("perl_match: Text doesn't contain the word 'eighth'.\n\n");
+
+                                              /** Match all occurrences of /wi../ **/
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                        9
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+            num_matches = perl_matches(text, "m/(wi..)/g", &matches);
+
+            printf("perl_matches: m/(wi..)/g found %d matches...\n", num_matches);
+            for (i = 0; i < num_matches; i++)
+              printf("match: %s\n", matches[i]);
+            printf("\n");
+            for (i = 0; i < num_matches; i++) {
+              free(matches[i]);
+            }
+            free(matches);
+
+                                              /** Remove all vowels from text **/
+            num_matches = perl_substitute(&text, "s/[aeiou]//gi");
+            if (num_matches) {
+              printf("perl_substitute: s/[aeiou]//gi...%d substitutions made.\n",
+               num_matches);
+              printf("Now text is: %s\n\n", text);
+            }
+
+                                              /** Attempt a substitution
+            if (!perl_substitute(&text, "s/Perl/C/")) {
+              printf("perl_substitute: s/Perl/C...No substitution made.\n\n");
+            }
+
+            free(text);
+
+            perl_destruct(my_perl);
+            perl_free(my_perl);
+          }
+
+       which produces the output
+
+          perl_match: Text contains the word 'quarter'.
+
+          perl_match: Text doesn't contain the word 'eighth'.
+
+          perl_matches: m/(wi..)/g found 2 matches...
+          match: will
+          match: with
+
+          perl_substitute: s/[aeiou]//gi...139 substitutions made.
+          Now text is: Whn h s t  cnvnnc str nd th bll cms t sm mnt lk 76 cnts, Mynrd s wr tht thr s smthng h *shld* d, smthng tht wll nbl hm t gt bck  qrtr, bt h hs n d *wht*.  H fmbls thrgh hs rd s
qzy chngprs nd gvs th by thr xtr pnns wth hs dllr, hpng tht h mght lck nt th crrct mnt.  Th by gvs hm bck tw f hs wn pnns nd thn th bg shny qrtr tht s hs prz. -RCHH
+

+          perl_substitute: s/Perl/C...No substitution made.
+
+       =head2 Fiddling with the Perl stack from your C program
+
+       When trying to explain stacks, most computer science
+       textbooks mumble something about spring-loaded columns of
+       cafeteria plates: the last thing you pushed on the stack
+       is the first thing you pop off.  That'll do for our
+       purposes: your C program will push some arguments onto
+       "the Perl stack", shut its eyes while some magic happens,
+       and then pop the results--the return value of your Perl
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                       10
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+       subroutine--off the stack.
+
+       First you'll need to know how to convert between C types
+       and Perl types, with newSViv() and sv_setnv() and newAV()
+       and all their friends.  They're described in the perlguts
+       manpage.
+
+       Then you'll need to know how to manipulate the Perl stack.
+       That's described in the perlcall manpage.
+
+       Once you've understood those, embedding Perl in C is easy.
+
+       Since C has no built-in function for integer
+       exponentiation, let's make Perl's ** operator available to
+       it (this is less useful than it sounds, since Perl
+       implements ** with C's pow() function).  First I'll create
+       a stub exponentiation function in power.pl:
+
+           sub expo {
+               my ($a, $b) = @_;
+               return $a ** $b;
+           }
+
+       Now I'll create a C program, power.c, with a function
+       PerlPower() that contains all the perlguts necessary to
+       push the two arguments into expo() and to pop the return
+       value out.  Take a deep breath...
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                       11
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+           #include <stdio.h>
+           #include <EXTERN.h>
+           #include <perl.h>
+
+           static PerlInterpreter *my_perl;
+
+           static void
+           PerlPower(int a, int b)
+           {
+             dSP;                            /* initialize stack pointer      */
+             ENTER;                          /* everything created after here */
+             SAVETMPS;                       /* ...is a temporary variable.   */
+             PUSHMARK(sp);                   /* remember the stack pointer    */
+             XPUSHs(sv_2mortal(newSViv(a))); /* push the base onto the stack  */
+             XPUSHs(sv_2mortal(newSViv(b))); /* push the exponent onto stack  */
+             PUTBACK;                      /* make local stack pointer global */
+             perl_call_pv("expo", G_SCALAR); /* call the function             */
+             SPAGAIN;                        /* refresh stack pointer         */
+                                           /* pop the return value from stack */
+             printf ("%d to the %dth power is %d.\n", a, b, POPi);
+             PUTBACK;
+             FREETMPS;                       /* free that return value        */
+             LEAVE;                       /* ...and the XPUSHed "mortal" args.*/
+           }
+
+           int main (int argc, char **argv, char **env)
+           {
+             char *my_argv[2];
+
+             my_perl = perl_alloc();
+             perl_construct( my_perl );
+
+             my_argv[1] = (char *) malloc(10);
+             sprintf(my_argv[1], "power.pl");
+
+             perl_parse(my_perl, NULL, argc, my_argv, env);
+
+             PerlPower(3, 4);                      /*** Compute 3 ** 4 ***/
+
+             perl_destruct(my_perl);
+             perl_free(my_perl);
+           }
+
+
+       Compile and run:
+
+           % cc -o power power.c -L/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE
+           -I/usr/local/lib/perl5/alpha-dec_osf/CORE -lperl -lm
+
+           % power
+           3 to the 4th power is 81.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                       12
+

+
+
+
+
+
PERLEMBED(1)     Perl Programmers Reference Guide    PERLEMBED(1)
+

+
+
MORAL
+
       You can sometimes write faster code in C, but you can
+       always write code faster in Perl.  Since you can use each
+       from the other, combine them as you wish.
+
+
AUTHOR
+
       Jon Orwant <orwant@media.mit.edu>, with contributions from
+       Tim Bunce, Tom Christiansen, Dov Grobgeld, and Ilya
+       Zakharevich.
+
+       December 18, 1995
+
+       Some of this material is excerpted from my book: Perl 5
+       Interactive, Waite Group Press, 1996 (ISBN 1-57169-064-6)
+       and appears courtesy of Waite Group Press.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
30/Jan/96                perl 5.003 with                       13
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/perror.htm b/reference/C/MAN/perror.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9fec91e --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/perror.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +perror + +
+
+
+
+
+
PERROR(3)               Library functions               PERROR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       perror - print a system error message
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       void perror(const char *s);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       perror  produces  a  message on the standard error output,
+       describing the last error encountered during a call  to  a
+       system  or  library  function.   The  argument string s is
+       printed first, then a colon and a blank, then the  message
+       and  a  new-line.   To be of most use, the argument string
+       should include the name of the program that  incurred  the
+       error.   The error number is taken from the external vari-
+       able errno, which is set when errors occur but not cleared
+       when non-erroneous calls are made.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       ANSI C, POSIX
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+errno, +strerror, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          March 16, 1995                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/printf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/printf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb8bf95 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/printf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ +printf + +
+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       printf,  fprintf,  sprintf,  vprintf, vfprintf, vsprintf -
+       formatted output conversion
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int printf( const char *format, ...);
+       int fprintf( FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);
+       int sprintf( char *str, const char *format, ...);
+
+       #include <stdarg.h>
+
+       int vprintf( const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vfprintf( FILE *stream, const  char  *format,  va_list
+       ap);
+       int vsprintf( char *str, char *format, va_list ap);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  printf  family of functions produces output according
+       to a format as described below.  Printf and vprintf  write
+       output  to stdout, the standard output stream; fprintf and
+       vfprintf write output to the given output stream; sprintf,
+       and  vsprintf  write  to  the character string str.  These
+       functions write the output under the control of  a  format
+       string  that  specifies how subsequent arguments (or argu-
+       ments accessed via the variable-length argument facilities
+       of  stdarg(3)  are  converted for output.  These functions
+       return the number of characters printed (not including the
+       trailing `\0' used to end output to strings).
+
+       The  format string is composed of zero or more directives:
+       ordinary characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to
+       the  output stream; and conversion specifications, each of
+       which results in fetching zero or  more  subsequent  argu-
+       ments.  Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+       character  %.   The  arguments  must  correspond  properly
+       (after  type  promotion)  with  the  conversion specifier.
+       After the %, the following appear in sequence:
+
+       o      Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+              #      specifying that the  value  should  be  con-
+                     verted  to an ``alternate form''.  For c, d,
+                     i, n, p, s, and u conversions,  this  option
+                     has  no effect.  For o conversions, the pre-
+                     cision of the number is increased  to  force
+                     the  first character of the output string to
+                     a zero (except if a zero  value  is  printed
+                     with  an explicit precision of zero).  For x
+                     and X conversions, a non-zero result has the
+                     string  `0x'  (or  `0X'  for  X conversions)
+                     prepended to it.  For e, E, f, g, and G con-
+                     versions,  the  result will always contain a
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+                     decimal point, even if no digits  follow  it
+                     (normally,  a  decimal  point appears in the
+                     results of those conversions only if a digit
+                     follows).  For g and G conversions, trailing
+                     zeros are not removed  from  the  result  as
+                     they would otherwise be.
+
+              0      specifying  zero  padding.   For all conver-
+                     sions  except  n,  the  converted  value  is
+                     padded  on  the  left with zeros rather than
+                     blanks.  If a  precision  is  given  with  a
+                     numeric  conversion  (d,  i, o, u, i, x, and
+                     X), the 0 flag is ignored.
+
+              -      (a negative field width flag) indicates  the
+                     converted  value  is  to be left adjusted on
+                     the field boundary.  Except  for  n  conver-
+                     sions,  the converted value is padded on the
+                     right with blanks, rather than on  the  left
+                     with  blanks or zeros.  A - overrides a 0 if
+                     both are given.
+
+                     (a space) specifying that a blank should  be
+                     left  before a positive number produced by a
+                     signed conversion (d, e, E, f, g, G, or  i).
+
+              +      specifying  that  a  sign  always  be placed
+                     before a number produced by a signed conver-
+                     sion.   A  +  overrides  a space if both are
+                     used.
+
+       o      An optional decimal digit string specifying a mini-
+              mum  field width.  If the converted value has fewer
+              characters than the field width, it will be  padded
+              with  spaces  on  the  left (or right, if the left-
+              adjustment flag has been given)  to  fill  out  the
+              field width.
+
+       o      An  optional  precision,  in  the  form of a period
+              (`.')  followed by an optional  digit  string.   If
+              the digit string is omitted, the precision is taken
+              as zero.  This gives the minimum number  of  digits
+              to appear for d, i, o, u, x, and X conversions, the
+              number of digits to appear after the  decimal-point
+              for  e, E, and f conversions, the maximum number of
+              significant digits for g and G conversions, or  the
+              maximum  number  of characters to be printed from a
+              string for s conversions.
+
+       o      The optional character h, specifying that a follow-
+              ing d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion corresponds to a
+              short int or unsigned short int argument, or that a
+              following  n conversion corresponds to a pointer to
+              a short int argument.
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+       o      The optional character l (ell)  specifying  that  a
+              following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion applies to
+              a pointer to a long int or unsigned long int  argu-
+              ment,  or that a following n conversion corresponds
+              to a pointer to a long int argument.
+
+       o      The character L specifying that a following  e,  E,
+              f,  g, or G conversion corresponds to a long double
+              argument.
+
+       o      A character that specifies the type  of  conversion
+              to be applied.
+
+       A  field  width or precision, or both, may be indicated by
+       an asterisk `*' instead of a digit string.  In this  case,
+       an  int argument supplies the field width or precision.  A
+       negative field width is treated as a left adjustment  flag
+       followed  by  a positive field width; a negative precision
+       is treated as though it were missing.
+
+       The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+       diouxX The int (or appropriate variant) argument  is  con-
+              verted  to signed decimal (d and i), unsigned octal
+              (o, unsigned decimal (u, or unsigned hexadecimal (x
+              and X) notation.  The letters abcdef are used for x
+              conversions; the letters ABCDEF are used for X con-
+              versions.  The precision, if any, gives the minimum
+              number of digits that must appear; if the converted
+              value  requires  fewer  digits, it is padded on the
+              left with zeros.
+
+       DOU    The long int argument is converted to signed  deci-
+              mal, unsigned octal, or unsigned decimal, as if the
+              format had been ld, lo, or lu respectively.   These
+              conversion  characters  are  deprecated,  and  will
+              eventually disappear.
+
+       eE     The double argument is rounded and converted in the
+              style  [-]d.dddedd  where there is one digit before
+              the decimal-point character and the number of  dig-
+              its after it is equal to the precision; if the pre-
+              cision is missing, it is taken as 6; if the  preci-
+              sion  is  zero, no decimal-point character appears.
+              An E conversion uses the letter E (rather  than  e)
+              to  introduce  the  exponent.   The exponent always
+              contains at least two digits; if the value is zero,
+              the exponent is 00.
+
+       f      The  double  argument  is  rounded and converted to
+              decimal notation in the style [-]ddd.ddd, where the
+              number  of digits after the decimal-point character
+              is equal to the precision  specification.   If  the
+              precision  is  missing,  it  is  taken as 6; if the
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       3
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+              precision  is  explicitly  zero,  no  decimal-point
+              character  appears.  If a decimal point appears, at
+              least one digit appears before it.
+
+       g      The double argument is converted in style  f  or  e
+              (or  E for G conversions).  The precision specifies
+              the number of significant digits.  If the precision
+              is missing, 6 digits are given; if the precision is
+              zero, it is treated as 1.  Style e is used  if  the
+              exponent  from  its  conversion  is less than -4 or
+              greater than or equal to the  precision.   Trailing
+              zeros  are  removed from the fractional part of the
+              result; a decimal point appears only if it is  fol-
+              lowed by at least one digit.
+
+       c      The  int argument is converted to an unsigned char,
+              and the resulting character is written.
+
+       s      The ``char *'' argument is expected to be a pointer
+              to  an  array  of  character  type  (pointer  to  a
+              string).  Characters from the array are written  up
+              to (but not including) a terminating NUL character;
+              if a precision is specified, no more than the  num-
+              ber  specified  are  written.   If  a  precision is
+              given, no null character need be  present;  if  the
+              precision  is not specified, or is greater than the
+              size of the array, the array must contain a  termi-
+              nating NUL character.
+
+       p      The  ``void *'' pointer argument is printed in hex-
+              adecimal (as if by %#x or %#lx).
+
+       n      The number of characters written so far  is  stored
+              into  the  integer  indicated  by the ``int *'' (or
+              variant) pointer argument.   No  argument  is  con-
+              verted.
+
+       %      A  `%'  is  written.  No argument is converted. The
+              complete conversion specification is `%%'.
+
+       In no case does a non-existent or small field width  cause
+       truncation  of  a  field; if the result of a conversion is
+       wider than the field width, the field is expanded to  con-
+       tain the conversion result.
+
+
+
EXAMPLES
+
       To  print  a  date  and  time in the form `Sunday, July 3,
+       10:02', where weekday and month are pointers to strings:
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              fprintf(stdout, "%s, %s %d, %.2d:%.2d\n",
+                   weekday, month, day, hour, min);
+
+       To print to five decimal places:
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       4
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+              #include <math.h>
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              fprintf(stdout, "pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
+
+       To allocate a 128 byte string and print into it:
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              #include <stdlib.h>
+              #include <stdarg.h>
+              char *newfmt(const char *fmt, ...)
+              {
+                        char *p;
+                        va_list ap;
+                        if ((p = malloc(128)) == NULL)
+                             return (NULL);
+                        va_start(ap, fmt);
+                        (void) vsnprintf(p, 128, fmt, ap);
+                        va_end(ap);
+                        return (p);
+              }
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+printf, +scanf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fprintf,  printf,  sprintf,  vprintf,  vfprintf,  and
+       vsprintf  functions  conform  to  ANSI C3.159-1989 (``ANSI
+       C'').
+
+
BUGS
+
       Some floating point conversions under Linux  cause  memory
+       leaks.
+
+       The conversion formats %D, %O, and %U are not standard and
+       are provided only for backward compatibility.   These  may
+       not be provided under Linux.
+
+       The  effect of padding the %p format with zeros (either by
+       the 0 flag or by specifying a precision), and  the  benign
+       effect  (i.e.,  none)  of  the # flag on %n and %p conver-
+       sions, as well as other nonsensical combinations  such  as
+       %Ld,   are  not  standard;  such  combinations  should  be
+       avoided.
+
+       Because sprintf and vsprintf  assume  an  infinitely  long
+       string, callers must be careful not to overflow the actual
+       space; this is often impossible to assure.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       5
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/putenv.htm b/reference/C/MAN/putenv.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8669e32 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/putenv.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +putenv + +
+
+
+
+
+
PUTENV(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PUTENV(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       putenv - change or add an environment variable
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int putenv(const char *string);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  putenv()  function adds or changes the value of envi-
+       ronment variables.  The argument string  is  of  the  form
+       name = value.  If name does not already exist in the envi-
+       ronment, then string is added to the environment.  If name
+       does  exist,  then the value of name in the environment is
+       changed to value.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The putenv() function returns zero on success, or -1 if an
+       error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ENOMEM Insufficient space to allocate new environment.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getenv, +setenv, +unsetenv, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 8, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/putpwent.htm b/reference/C/MAN/putpwent.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a639ef --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/putpwent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +putpwent + +
+
+
+
+
+
PUTPWENT(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         PUTPWENT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       putpwent - write a password file entry
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <pwd.h>
+       #include <stdio.h>
+       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       int putpwent(const struct passwd *p, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  putpwent()  function writes a password entry from the
+       structure p in the file associated with stream.
+
+       The passwd structure is defined in <pwd.h> as follows:
+
+              struct passwd {
+                      char    *pw_name;       /* user name */
+                      char    *pw_passwd;     /* user password */
+                      uid_t   pw_uid;         /* user id */
+                      gid_t   pw_gid;         /* group id */
+                      char    *pw_gecos;      /* real name */
+                      char    *pw_dir;        /* home directory */
+                      char    *pw_shell;      /* shell program */
+              };
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The putpwent() function returns 0 on success, or -1 if  an
+       error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINVAL Invalid (NULL) argument given.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fgetpwent, +getpwent, +setpwent, +endpwent, +getpwuid, +getpw, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 9, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/puts.htm b/reference/C/MAN/puts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc037e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/puts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +puts + +
+
+
+
+
+
PUTS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             PUTS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fputc,  fputs,  putc, putchar, puts - output of characters
+       and strings
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
+       int fputs(const char *s, FILE *stream);
+       int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
+       int putchar(int c);
+       int puts(char *s);
+       int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       fputc() writes the character c, cast to an unsigned  char,
+       to stream.
+
+       fputs()  writes the string s to stream, without its trail-
+       ing '\0'.
+
+       putc() is equivalent to fputc()  except  that  it  may  be
+       implemented  as  a  macro which evaluates stream more than
+       once.
+
+       putchar(c); is equivalent to putc(c,stdout).
+
+       puts() writes the string s and a trailing newline to  std-
+       out.
+
+       Calls  to  the  functions described here can be mixed with
+       each other and with calls to other output  functions  from
+       the stdio library for the same output stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fputc(), putc() and putchar() return the character written
+       as an unsigned char cast to an int or EOF on error.
+
+       puts() and fputs() return a non - negative number on  suc-
+       cess, or EOF on error.
+
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C, POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       It  is not advisable to mix calls to output functions from
+       the stdio library with low - level calls  to  write()  for
+       the  file  descriptor  associated  with  the  same  output
+       stream; the results will be undefined  and  very  probably
+       not what you want.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+write, +fopen, +fwrite, +scanf, +gets, +

+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
PUTS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             PUTS(3)
+

+
+       fseek(3), ferror(3)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/raise.htm b/reference/C/MAN/raise.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6050ae4 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/raise.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +raise + +
+
+
+
+
+
RAISE(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            RAISE(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       raise - send a signal.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <signal.h>
+
+       int raise (int sig);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       raise()  sends  a  signal  to  the current process.  It is
+       equivalent to kill(getpid(),sig)
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       Zero for success, nonzero for failure.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+kill, +signal, +getpid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/rand.htm b/reference/C/MAN/rand.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1de27c --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/rand.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +rand + +
+
+
+
+
+
RAND(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             RAND(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       rand, srand - random number generator.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int rand(void);
+
+       void srand(unsigned int seed);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The   rand()  function  returns  a  pseudo-random  integer
+       between 0 and RAND_MAX.
+
+       The srand() function sets its argument as the seed  for  a
+       new  sequence  of pseudo-random integers to be returned by
+       rand().  These sequences are repeatable by calling srand()
+       with the same seed value.
+
+       If no seed value is provided, the rand() function is auto-
+       matically seeded with a value of 1.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  rand()  function  returns  a  value  between  0   and
+       RAND_MAX.  The srand() returns no value.
+
+
NOTES
+
       The  versions of rand() and srand() in the Linux C Library
+       use the same random number generator as random() and sran-
+       dom(),  so the lower-order bits should be as random as the
+       higher-order bits.  However, on older  rand()  implementa-
+       tions,  the lower-order bits are much less random than the
+       higher-order bits.
+
+       In Numerical Recipes in C: The Art of Scientific Computing
+       (William  H.  Press, Brian P. Flannery, Saul A. Teukolsky,
+       William T.  Vetterling;  New  York:  Cambridge  University
+       Press,  1990 (1st ed, p. 207)), the following comments are
+       made:
+              "If you want to generate a random integer between 1
+              and 10, you should always do it by
+
+                     j=1+(int) (10.0*rand()/(RAND_MAX+1.0));
+
+              and never by anything resembling
+
+                     j=1+((int) (1000000.0*rand()) % 10);
+
+              (which uses lower-order bits)."
+
+       Random-number  generation is a complex topic.  The Numeri-
+       cal Recipes in C book (see reference  above)  provides  an
+       excellent discussion of practical random-number generation
+       issues in Chapter 7 (Random Numbers).
+
+
+
+
GNU                        18 May 1995                          1
+

+
+
+
+
+
RAND(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             RAND(3)
+

+
+       For a more theoretical discussion which also  covers  many
+       practical  issues  in  depth, please see Chapter 3 (Random
+       Numbers) in Donald E. Knuth's The Art of Computer Program-
+       ming,  volume 2 (Seminumerical Algorithms), 2nd ed.; Read-
+       ing,  Massachusetts:  Addison-Wesley  Publishing  Company,
+       1981.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+random, +srandom, +initstate, +setstate, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        18 May 1995                          2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/readdir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/readdir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39b3d23 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/readdir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +readdir + +
+
+
+
+
+
READDIR(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          READDIR(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       readdir - read directory entry
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+       #include <linux/dirent.h>
+       #include <linux/unistd.h>
+
+       _syscall3(int, readdir, uint, fd, struct dirent *, dirp, uint, count);
+
+       int readdir(unsigned int fd, struct dirent *dirp, unsigned int count);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       This  is  not the function you are interested in.  Look at
+       readdir(3) for the POSIX conforming C  library  interface.
+       This page documents the bare kernel system call interface,
+       which can change, and which is superseded by  getdents(2).
+
+       readdir  reads  one  dirent  structure  from the directory
+       pointed at by fd into the memory area pointed to by  dirp.
+       The  parameter count is ignored; at most one dirent struc-
+       ture is read.
+
+       The dirent structure is declared as follows:
+
+              struct dirent
+              {
+                  long d_ino;                 /* inode number */
+                  off_t d_off;                /* offset to this dirent */
+                  unsigned short d_reclen;    /* length of this d_name */
+                  char d_name [NAME_MAX+1];   /* file name (null-terminated) */
+              }
+
+       d_ino is an inode number.  d_off is the distance from  the
+       start  of  the  directory to this dirent.  d_reclen is the
+       size of d_name, not counting the null terminator.   d_name
+       is a null-terminated file name.
+
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  1  is  returned.   On end of directory, 0 is
+       returned.  On error, -1 is  returned,  and  errno  is  set
+       appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  Invalid file descriptor fd.
+
+       ENOTDIR
+              File descriptor does not refer to a directory.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       This system call is Linux specific.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.3.6                22 July 1995                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
READDIR(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          READDIR(2)
+

+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getdents, +readdir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.3.6                22 July 1995                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/realloc.htm b/reference/C/MAN/realloc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..359cb98 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/realloc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +realloc + +
+
+
+
+
+
MALLOC(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           MALLOC(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       calloc,  malloc, free, realloc - Allocate and free dynamic
+       memory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+       void *malloc(size_t size);
+       void free(void *ptr);
+       void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       calloc() allocates memory for an array of  nmemb  elements
+       of  size bytes each and returns a pointer to the allocated
+       memory.  The memory is set to zero.
+
+       malloc() allocates size bytes and returns a pointer to the
+       allocated memory.  The memory is not cleared.
+
+       free()  frees  the  memory  space pointed to by ptr, which
+       must have been returned by a previous  call  to  malloc(),
+       calloc()  or  realloc().   If ptr is NULL, no operation is
+       performed.
+
+       realloc() changes the size of the memory block pointed  to
+       by  ptr  to size bytes.  The contents will be unchanged to
+       the minimum of the old an new sizes; newly allocated  mem-
+       ory  will  be  uninitialized.  If ptr is NULL, the call is
+       equivalent to malloc(size); if size is equal to zero,  the
+       call  is  equivalent to free(ptr).  Unless ptr is NULL, it
+       must have been returned by an earlier  call  to  malloc(),
+       calloc() or realloc().
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       For calloc() and malloc(), the value returned is a pointer
+       to the allocated memory, which is suitably aligned for any
+       kind of variable, or NULL if the request fails.
+
+       free() returns no value.
+
+       realloc() returns a pointer to the newly allocated memory,
+       which is suitably aligned for any kind of variable and may
+       be  different from ptr, or NULL if the request fails or if
+       size was equal to 0.   If  realloc()  fails  the  original
+       block is left untouched - it is not freed or moved.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+brk, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/remove.htm b/reference/C/MAN/remove.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9e7146b --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/remove.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +remove + +
+
+
+
+
+
REMOVE(3)                      GNU                      REMOVE(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       remove - delete a name and possibly the file it refers to
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int remove(const char *pathname);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       remove  deletes  a  name from the filesystem. If that name
+       was the last link to a file and no processes have the file
+       open  the  file  is  deleted and the space it was using is
+       made available for reuse.
+
+       If the name was the last link to a file but any  processes
+       still have the file open the file will remain in existence
+       until the last file descriptor referring to it is  closed.
+
+       If  the  name  referred  to  a  symbolic  link the link is
+       removed.
+
+       If the name referred to a socket, fifo or device the  name
+       for it is removed but processes which have the object open
+       may continue to use it.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EFAULT  pathname  points  outside  your accessible address
+               space.
+
+       EACCES  Write access to the directory containing  pathname
+               is not allowed for the process's effective uid, or
+               one of the directories in pathname did  not  allow
+               search (execute) permission.
+
+       EPERM   The  directory containing pathname has the sticky-
+               bit (S_ISVTX) set and the process's effective  uid
+               is  neither  the uid of the file to be deleted nor
+               that of the directory containing it.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               pathname was too long.
+
+       ENOENT  A directory component in pathname does  not  exist
+               or is a dangling symbolic link.
+
+       ENOTDIR A  component  used  as  a directory in pathname is
+               not, in fact, a directory.
+
+       EISDIR  pathname refers to a directory.
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                      13 July 1994                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
REMOVE(3)                      GNU                      REMOVE(3)
+

+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       EROFS   pathname refers to a file on a read-only  filesys-
+               tem.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
BUGS
+
       In-felicities in the protocol underlying NFS can cause the
+       unexpected disappearance of files which  are  still  being
+       used.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+unlink, +rename, +open, +rmdir, +mknod, +mkfifo, +link, +rm, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                      13 July 1994                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/rename.htm b/reference/C/MAN/rename.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3c2e50 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/rename.htm @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +rename + +
+
+
+
+
+
RENAME(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           RENAME(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       rename - change the name or location of a file
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int rename(const char *oldpath, const char *newpath);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       rename  renames  a  file, moving it between directories if
+       required.
+
+       Any other hard links to the file (as created  using  link)
+       are unaffected.
+
+       If  newpath already exists it will be atomically overwrit-
+       ten (subject to a few conditions - see ERRORS  below),  so
+       that there is no point at which another process attempting
+       to access newpath will find it missing.
+
+       If newpath exists but the operation fails for some  reason
+       or  the  system  crashes  rename  guarantees  to  leave an
+       instance of newpath in place.
+
+       However, when overwriting there will probably be a  window
+       in  which both oldpath and newpath refer to the file being
+       renamed.
+
+       If oldpath refers to a symbolic link the link is  renamed;
+       if  newpath  refers  to  a  symbolic link the link will be
+       overwritten.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EISDIR  newpath  is  an existing directory, but oldpath is
+               not a directory.
+
+       EXDEV   oldpath and newpath are not on the  same  filesys-
+               tem.
+
+       ENOTEMPTY
+               newpath is a non-empty directory.
+
+       EBUSY   newpath  exists  and is the current working direc-
+               tory or root directory of some process.
+
+       EINVAL  An attempt was made to make a directory  a  subdi-
+               rectory of itself.
+
+       EMLINK  oldpath already has the maximum number of links to
+               it, or  it  was  a  directory  and  the  directory
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.7               24 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
RENAME(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           RENAME(2)
+

+
+               containing  newpath  has  the  maximum  number  of
+               links.
+
+       ENOTDIR A component used as a directory in oldpath or new-
+               path is not, in fact, a directory.
+
+       EFAULT  oldpath  or newpath points outside your accessible
+               address space.
+
+       EACCES  Write access to the directory  containing  oldpath
+               or newpath is not allowed for the process's effec-
+               tive uid, or one of the directories in oldpath  or
+               newpath did not allow search (execute) permission,
+               or oldpath was a directory and did not allow write
+               permission (needed to update the ..  entry).
+
+       EPERM   The  directory  containing  oldpath has the sticky
+               bit set and the process's effective uid is neither
+               the  uid of the file to be deleted nor that of the
+               directory containing it, or  the  filesystem  con-
+               taining  pathname does not support renaming of the
+               type requested.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               oldpath or newpath was too long.
+
+       ENOENT  A directory component in oldpath  or  newpath does
+               not exist or is a dangling symbolic link.
+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       EROFS   The file is on a read-only filesystem.
+
+       ELOOP   oldpath  or newpath contains a reference to a cir-
+               cular symbolic link,  ie  a  symbolic  link  whose
+               expansion contains a reference to itself.
+
+       ENOSPC  The device containing the file has no room for the
+               new directory entry.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX, BSD 4.3, ANSI C
+
+
BUGS
+
       Currently (Linux 0.99pl7) most of the  filesystems  except
+       Minix  will  not  allow  any overwriting renames involving
+       directories. You get EEXIST if you try.
+
+       On NFS filesystems, you can not assume that  only  because
+       the  operation  failed,  the file was not renamed.  If the
+       server does the rename operation  and  then  crashes,  the
+       retransmitted  RPC which will be processed when the server
+       is up again causes a failure.  The application is expected
+       to deal with this.  See link(2) for a similar problem.
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.7               24 July 1993                         2
+

+
+
+
+
+
RENAME(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           RENAME(2)
+

+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+link, +unlink, +symlink, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.7               24 July 1993                         3
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/rewinddir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/rewinddir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ca61f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/rewinddir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +rewinddir + +
+
+
+
+
+
REWINDDIR(3)        Linux Programmer's Manual        REWINDDIR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       rewinddir - reset directory stream
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/types.h>
+
+       #include <dirent.h>
+
+       void rewinddir(DIR *dir);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The rewinddir() function resets the position of the direc-
+       tory stream dir to the beginning of the directory.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The readdir() function returns no value.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+opendir, +readdir, +closedir, +seekdir, +telldir, +scandir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           11 June 1995                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/rmdir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/rmdir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8a6f4d --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/rmdir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +rmdir + +
+
+
+
+
+
RMDIR(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            RMDIR(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       rmdir - delete a directory
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int rmdir(const char *pathname);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       rmdir deletes a directory, which must be empty.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EPERM   The filesystem containing pathname does  not  sup-
+               port the removal of directories.
+
+       EFAULT  pathname  points  outside  your accessible address
+               space.
+
+       EACCES  Write access to the directory containing  pathname
+               was  not  allowed for the process's effective uid,
+               or one of the  directories  in  pathname  did  not
+               allow search (execute) permission.
+
+       EPERM   The  directory containing pathname has the sticky-
+               bit (S_ISVTX) set and the process's effective  uid
+               is  neither  the uid of the file to be deleted nor
+               that of the directory containing it.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               pathname was too long.
+
+       ENOENT  A directory component in pathname does  not  exist
+               or is a dangling symbolic link.
+
+       ENOTDIR pathname,  or  a  component used as a directory in
+               pathname, is not, in fact, a directory.
+
+       ENOTEMPTY
+               pathname contains entries other than . and .. .
+
+       EBUSY   pathname is the current working directory or  root
+               directory of some process.
+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       EROFS   pathname  refers to a file on a read-only filesys-
+               tem.
+
+       ELOOP   pathname contains a reference to a  circular  sym-
+               bolic  link,  ie  a  symbolic  link  containing  a
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.7               24 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
RMDIR(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            RMDIR(2)
+

+
+               reference to itself.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, BSD 4.3
+
+
BUGS
+
       Infelicities in the protocol underlying NFS can cause  the
+       unexpected  disappearance  of  directories which are still
+       being used.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+rename, +mkdir, +chdir, +unlink, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.7               24 July 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/scandir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/scandir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9c9817 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/scandir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +scandir + +
+
+
+
+
+
SCANDIR(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SCANDIR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       scandir, alphasort - scan a directory for matching entries
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <dirent.h>
+
+       int scandir(const char *dir, struct dirent ***namelist,
+              int (*select)(const struct dirent *),
+              int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
+
+       int alphasort(const struct dirent *a, const struct dirent *b);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The scandir() function scans the  directory  dir,  calling
+       select()  on  each  directory  entry.   Entries  for which
+       select() returns non-zero are stored in strings  allocated
+       via  malloc(),  sorted  using  qsort() with the comparison
+       function compar(), and collected in array  namelist  which
+       is allocated via malloc().
+
+       The  alphasort()  function  can  be used as the comparison
+       function for the scandir() function to sort the  directory
+       entries  into  alphabetical order.  Its parameters are the
+       two directory entries, a and b, to compare.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The scandir() function returns  the  number  of  directory
+       entries selected or -1 if an error occurs.
+
+       The  alphasort()  function  returns  an integer less than,
+       equal to, or greater than zero if the  first  argument  is
+       considered  to  be  respectively  less  than, equal to, or
+       greater than the second.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ENOMEM Insufficient memory to complete the operation.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+opendir, +readdir, +closedir, +rewinddir, +telldir, +seekdir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 31, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/scanf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/scanf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9f2e7a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/scanf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ +scanf + +
+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       scanf,  fscanf,  sscanf,  vscanf, vsscanf, vfscanf - input
+       format conversion
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+       int scanf( const char *format, ...);
+       int fscanf( FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);
+       int sscanf( const char *str, const char *format, ...);
+
+       #include <stdarg.h>
+       int vscanf( const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vsscanf( const char *str, const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vfscanf( FILE *stream, const char *format, va_list ap);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The scanf family of functions scans input according  to  a
+       format  as  described below.  This format may contain con-
+       version specifiers; the results from such conversions,  if
+       any,  are stored through the pointer arguments.  The scanf
+       function reads input from the standard input stream stdin,
+       fscanf  reads  input  from  the stream pointer stream, and
+       sscanf reads its input from the character  string  pointed
+       to by str.
+
+       The vfscanf function is analogous to vfprintf(3) and reads
+       input from the stream  pointer  stream  using  a  variable
+       argument  list  of  pointers  (see  stdarg(3).  The vscanf
+       function scans a variable argument list from the  standard
+       input  and  the  vsscanf  function scans it from a string;
+       these are analogous to the vprintf and vsprintf  functions
+       respectively.
+
+       Each  successive pointer argument must correspond properly
+       with each successive conversion specifier (but  see  `sup-
+       pression' below).  All conversions are introduced by the %
+       (percent sign) character.  The format string may also con-
+       tain other characters.  White space (such as blanks, tabs,
+       or newlines) in the format  string  match  any  amount  of
+       white  space,  including  none,  in the input.  Everything
+       else matches only itself.  Scanning stops  when  an  input
+       character  does  not match such a format character.  Scan-
+       ning also stops when an input conversion  cannot  be  made
+       (see below).
+
+
CONVERSIONS
+
       Following  the  % character introducing a conversion there
+       may be a number of flag characters, as follows:
+
+       *      Suppresses assignment.  The conversion that follows
+              occurs as usual, but no pointer is used; the result
+              of the conversion is simply discarded.
+
+       h      Indicates that the conversion will be one of  dioux
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+              or  n  and the next pointer is a pointer to a short
+              int (rather than int).
+
+       l      Indicates either that the conversion will be one of
+              dioux  or  n and the next pointer is a pointer to a
+              long int (rather than int), or that the  conversion
+              will  be  one  of  efg  and  the  next pointer is a
+              pointer to double (rather than float).
+
+       L      Indicates that the conversion will be efg  and  the
+              next  pointer  is  a pointer to long double.  (This
+              type is not implemented; the L  flag  is  currently
+              ignored--this may not be true for Linux.)
+
+       In addition to these flags, there may be an optional maxi-
+       mum field width, expressed as a decimal  integer,  between
+       the % and the conversion.  If no width is given, a default
+       of `infinity' is used (with one exception, below);  other-
+       wise  at most this many characters are scanned in process-
+       ing the conversion.  Before conversion begins,  most  con-
+       versions skip white space; this white space is not counted
+       against the field width.
+
+       The following conversions are available:
+
+       %      Matches a literal `%'.  That is, `%%' in the format
+              string  matches  a  single input `%' character.  No
+              conversion is done, and assignment does not  occur.
+
+       d      Matches  an  optionally signed decimal integer; the
+              next pointer must be a pointer to int.
+
+       D      Equivalent to ld; this exists  only  for  backwards
+              compatibility.
+
+       i      Matches  an  optionally  signed  integer;  the next
+              pointer must be a pointer to int.  The  integer  is
+              read  in base 16 if it begins with `0x' or `0X', in
+              base 8 if it begins with `0', and in base 10 other-
+              wise.   Only characters that correspond to the base
+              are used.
+
+       o      Matches an octal integer; the next pointer must  be
+              a pointer to unsigned int.
+
+       O      Equivalent to lo; this exists for backwards compat-
+              ibility.
+
+       u      Matches an optionally signed decimal  integer;  the
+              next pointer must be a pointer to unsigned int.
+
+       x      Matches an optionally a signed hexadecimal integer;
+              the next pointer must be a pointer to unsigned int.
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+       X      Equivalent   to   lx;   this   violates   the  ANSI
+              C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'') but is backwards  compati-
+              ble  with  previous UNIX systems--I don't know what
+              Linux does with this.
+
+       f      Matches an optionally signed floating-point number;
+              the next pointer must be a pointer to float.
+
+       e      Equivalent to f.
+
+       g      Equivalent to f.
+
+       E      Equivalent   to   lf;   this   violates   the  ANSI
+              C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'') but is backwards  compati-
+              ble  with  previous UNIX systems--I don't know what
+              Linux does with this.
+
+       F      Equivalent to lf; this exists  only  for  backwards
+              compatibility.
+
+       s      Matches  a  sequence of non-white-space characters;
+              the next pointer must be a pointer to char, and the
+              array  must  be  large  enough  to  accept  all the
+              sequence and the terminating  NUL  character.   The
+              input string stops at white space or at the maximum
+              field width, whichever occurs first.
+
+       c      Matches  a  sequence  of  width  count   characters
+              (default  1); the next pointer must be a pointer to
+              char, and there must be enough  room  for  all  the
+              characters  (no  terminating  NUL  is  added).  The
+              usual skip of leading white  space  is  suppressed.
+              To skip white space first, use an explicit space in
+              the format.
+
+       [      Matches a nonempty sequence of characters from  the
+              specified  set  of  accepted  characters;  the next
+              pointer must be a pointer to char, and  there  must
+              be  enough  room  for  all  the  characters  in the
+              string, plus  a  terminating  NUL  character.   The
+              usual  skip  of  leading white space is suppressed.
+              The string is to be made up of  characters  in  (or
+              not in) a particular set; the set is defined by the
+              characters between the open bracket [ character and
+              a  close  bracket  ]  character.   The set excludes
+              those characters if the first character  after  the
+              open bracket is a circumflex ^.  To include a close
+              bracket in the set, make  it  the  first  character
+              after the open bracket or the circumflex; any other
+              position will end the set.  The hyphen character  -
+              is  also  special;  when  placed  between two other
+              characters, it adds all intervening  characters  to
+              the  set.   To  include  a hyphen, make it the last
+              character before  the  final  close  bracket.   For
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       3
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+              instance,  `[^]0-9-]'  means  the  set  `everything
+              except  close  bracket,  zero  through  nine,   and
+              hyphen'.   The string ends with the appearance of a
+              character not in the (or, with  a  circumflex,  in)
+              set or when the field width runs out.
+
+       p      Matches  a  pointer  value  (as  printed by `%p' in
+              printf(3); the next pointer must be  a  pointer  to
+              void.
+
+       n      Nothing is expected; instead, the number of charac-
+              ters consumed thus far from  the  input  is  stored
+              through  the  next pointer, which must be a pointer
+              to int.  This is not a conversion, although it  can
+              be suppressed with the * flag.
+
+       For  backwards  compatibility, other conversion characters
+       (except `\0') are taken as if they were `%d' or, if upper-
+       case, `%ld', and a `conversion' of `%\0' causes an immedi-
+       ate return of EOF.   The  F  and  X  conversions  will  be
+       changed in the future to conform to the
+        ANSI  C  standard,  after  which  they  will act like and
+       respectively.  The behavior of Linux on  the  non-standard
+       points is not known by this documenter.
+
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       These functions return the number of input items assigned,
+       which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the
+       event  of  a matching failure.  Zero indicates that, while
+       there was input available, no conversions  were  assigned;
+       typically  this is due to an invalid input character, such
+       as an alphabetic character for  a  `%d'  conversion.   The
+       value  EOF  is  returned if an input failure occurs before
+       any conversion such as an end-of-file occurs. If an  error
+       or end-of-file occurs after conversion has begun, the num-
+       ber of conversions which were  successfully  completed  is
+       returned.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+strtol, +strtoul, +strtod, +getc, +printf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  functions  fscanf,  scanf, and sscanf conform to ANSI
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
BUGS
+
       Differences for Linux are not known  at  this  time.   The
+       following is for the BSD version:
+
+       The current situation with %F and %X conversions is unfor-
+       tunate.
+
+       All of the backwards compatibility formats will be removed
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       4
+

+
+
+
+
+
SCANF(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SCANF(3)
+

+
+       in the future.
+
+       Numerical  strings  are  truncated  to 512 characters; for
+       example, %f and %d are implicitly %512f and %512d.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       5
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/seekdir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/seekdir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae8e4bf --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/seekdir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +seekdir + +
+
+
+
+
+
SEEKDIR(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SEEKDIR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       seekdir  -  set the position of the next readdir() call in
+       the directory stream.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <dirent.h>
+
+       void seekdir(DIR *dir, off_t offset);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The seekdir() function sets the location in the  directory
+       stream  from  which  the  next  readdir() call will start.
+       seekdir() should  be  used  with  an  offset  returned  by
+       telldir().
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The seekdir() function returns no value.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+lseek, +opendir, +readdir, +closedir, +dir, +telldir, +scandir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          March 31, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setbuf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setbuf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc4ddeb --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setbuf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +setbuf + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETBUF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SETBUF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setbuf,  setbuffer, setlinebuf, setvbuf - stream buffering
+       operations
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int setbuf( FILE *stream, char *buf);
+       int setbuffer( FILE *stream, char *buf, size_tsize);
+       int setlinebuf( FILE *stream);
+       int setvbuf( FILE *stream, char *buf, int mode , size_t
+       size);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  three  types  of  buffering available are unbuffered,
+       block buffered, and line buffered.  When an output  stream
+       is unbuffered, information appears on the destination file
+       or terminal as soon as written; when it is block  buffered
+       many  characters are saved up and written as a block; when
+       it is line buffered characters are saved up until  a  new-
+       line  is  output or input is read from any stream attached
+       to a terminal  device  (typically  stdin).   The  function
+       fflush(3)  may be used to force the block out early.  (See
+       fclose(3).)  Normally all files are block buffered.   When
+       the  first  I/O  operation  occurs on a file, malloc(3) is
+       called, and a buffer is obtained.  If a stream refers to a
+       terminal  (as  stdout  normally does) it is line buffered.
+       The standard error stream stderr is always unbuffered.
+
+       The setvbuf function may be used at any time on  any  open
+       stream  to  change its buffer.  The mode parameter must be
+       one of the following three macros:
+
+              _IONBF unbuffered
+
+              _IOLBF line buffered
+
+              _IOFBF fully buffered
+
+       Except for unbuffered files, the buf argument should point
+       to  a buffer at least size bytes long; this buffer will be
+       used instead of the current buffer.  If the  argument  buf
+       is  NULL,  only the mode is affected; a new buffer will be
+       allocated on  the  next  read  or  write  operation.   The
+       setvbuf  function  may  be  used at any time, but can only
+       change the mode of a stream when  it  is  not  ``active'':
+       that  is,  before  any I/O, or immediately after a call to
+       fflush.
+
+       The other three calls are, in effect, simply  aliases  for
+       calls  to setvbuf.  The setbuf function is exactly equiva-
+       lent to the call
+
+              setvbuf(stream,  buf,  buf    _IOFBF   :   _IONBF,
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SETBUF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SETBUF(3)
+

+
+              BUFSIZ);
+
+       The  setbuffer  function is the same, except that the size
+       of the buffer is up  to  the  caller,  rather  than  being
+       determined by the default BUFSIZ.  The setlinebuf function
+       is exactly equivalent to the call:
+
+              setvbuf(stream, (char *)NULL, _IOLBF, 0);
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+fopen, +fclose, +fread, +malloc, +puts, +printf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The   setbuf   and   setvbuf  functions  conform  to  ANSI
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
BUGS
+
       The setbuffer and setlinebuf functions are not portable to
+       versions  of  BSD  before 4.2BSD, and may not be available
+       under Linux.  On 4.2BSD and 4.3BSD systems, setbuf  always
+       uses a suboptimal buffer size and should be avoided.
+
+       You  must  make sure that both buf and the space it points
+       to still exist by the time stream is  closed,  which  also
+       happens at program termination.
+
+       For example, the following is illegal:
+
+       #include <stdio.h>
+       int main()
+       {
+           char buf[BUFSIZ];
+           setbuf(stdin, buf);
+           printf("Hello, world!\n");
+           return 0;
+       }
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setegid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setegid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1dd511 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setegid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +setegid + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETREGID(2)         Linux Programmer's Manual         SETREGID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setregid, setegid - set real and / or effective group ID
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int setregid(gid_t rgid, gid_t egid);
+       int setegid(gid_t egid);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setregid sets real and effective group ID's of the current
+       process.  Un-privileged users may change the real group ID
+       to the effective group ID and vice-versa.
+
+       Prior  to  Linux  1.1.38, the saved ID paradigm, when used
+       with setregid or setegid was broken.  Starting at  1.1.38,
+       it is also possible to set the effective group ID from the
+       saved user ID.
+
+       Only the super-user may make other changes.
+
+       Supplying a value of -1 for either the real  or  effective
+       group ID forces the system to leave that ID unchanged.
+
+       Currently   (libc-4.x.x),  setegid(egid)  is  functionally
+       equivalent to setregid(-1, egid).
+
+       If the real group ID is changed or the effective group  ID
+       is set to a value not equal to the previous real group ID,
+       the saved group ID will be set to the new effective  group
+       ID.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EPERM   The current process  is  not  the  super-user  and
+               changes  other  than  (i)  swapping  the effective
+               group ID with the real group ID  or  (ii)  setting
+               one to the value of the other or (iii) setting the
+               effective group ID to the value of the saved group
+               ID was specified.
+
+
HISTORY
+
       The setregid function call appeared in BSD 4.2.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getgid, +setgid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.38             2nd August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setenv.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setenv.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9d00d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setenv.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +setenv + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETENV(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SETENV(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setenv - change or add an environment variable
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int setenv(const char *name, const char *value, int overwrite);
+
+       void unsetenv(const char *name);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  setenv() function adds the variable name to the envi-
+       ronment with the value value, if  name  does  not  already
+       exist.   If  name  does exist in the environment, then its
+       value is changed to value if  overwrite  is  non-zero;  if
+       overwrite  is zero, then the value of name is not changed.
+
+       The unsetenv() function deletes the variable name from the
+       environment.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  setenv()  function  returns zero on success, or -1 if
+       there was insufficient space in the environment.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getenv, +putenv, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/seteuid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/seteuid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de43dee --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/seteuid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +setreuid + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETREUID(2)         Linux Programmer's Manual         SETREUID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setreuid, seteuid - set real and / or effective user ID
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int setreuid(uid_t ruid, uid_t euid);
+       int seteuid(uid_t euid);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setreuid  sets real and effective user ID's of the current
+       process.  Un-privileged users may change the real user  ID
+       to the effective user ID and vice-versa.
+
+       Prior  to  Linux  1.1.37, the saved ID paradigm, when used
+       with setreuid or seteuid was broken.
+
+       Starting at 1.1.37, it is also possible to set the  effec-
+       tive user ID from the saved user ID.
+
+       Only the super-user may make other changes.
+
+       Supplying  a  value of -1 for either the real or effective
+       user ID forces the system to leave that ID unchanged.
+
+       Currently  (libc-4.x.x),  seteuid(euid)  is   functionally
+       equivalent to setreuid(-1, euid).
+
+       If the real user ID is changed or the effective user ID is
+       set to a value not equal to the previous real user ID, the
+       saved user ID will be set to the new effective user ID.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EPERM   The current process  is  not  the  super-user  and
+               changes other than (i) swapping the effective user
+               ID with the real user ID or (ii)  setting  one  to
+               the value of the other or (iii) setting the effec-
+               tive user ID to the value of the saved user ID was
+               specified.
+
+
HISTORY
+
       The setreuid function call appeared in BSD 4.2.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getuid, +setuid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.38             2nd August 1994                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setgid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setgid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c41be33 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setgid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +setgid + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETGID(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SETGID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setgid - set group identity
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int setgid(gid_t gid)
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setgid sets the effective group ID of the current process.
+       If the caller is the superuser, the real and  saved  group
+       ID's are also set.
+
+       Under   Linux,   setgid  is  implemented  like  SYSV  with
+       SAVED_IDS.  This allows a setgid (other than root) program
+       to  drop  all  of it's group privileges, do some un-privi-
+       leged work, and  then  re-engage  the  original  effective
+       group ID in a secure manner.
+
+       If the user is root or the program is setgid root, special
+       care must be taken. The setgid function checks the  effec-
+       tive  gid  of  the  caller and if it is the superuser, all
+       process related group ID's are set to gid.  After this has
+       occurred,  it is impossible for the program to regain root
+       privileges.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EPERM   The  user  is not the super-user, and gid does not
+               match the effective or saved group ID of the call-
+               ing process.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       System V
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getgid, +setregid, +setegid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.36               29 July 1994                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setjmp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setjmp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c52e96 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setjmp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +setjmp + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETJMP(3)               Library functions               SETJMP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setjmp - save stack context for non-local goto
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <setjmp.h>
+
+       int setjmp(jmp_buf env );
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setjmp  and  longjmp(3) are useful for dealing with errors
+       and interrupts encountered in a low-level subroutine of  a
+       program.   setjmp() saves the stack context/environment in
+       env for later use by longjmp().  The stack context will be
+       invalidated if the function which called setjmp() returns.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       It returns the value 0 if returning directly and  non-zero
+       when returning from longjmp() using the saved context.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX
+
+
NOTES
+
       POSIX does not specify if the signal context will be saved
+       or  not.   If  you  want  to  save   signal   masks,   use
+       sigsetjmp(3).   setjmp() makes programs hard to understand
+       and maintain.  If possible an alternative should be  used.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+, +sigsetjmp, +siglongjmp, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                        November 25, 1994                       1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setlocale.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setlocale.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1a6c4c --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setlocale.htm @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +setlocale + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETLOCALE(3)        Linux Programmer's Manual        SETLOCALE(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setlocale - set the current locale.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <locale.h>
+
+       char *setlocale(int category, const char * locale);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  setlocale() function is used to set or query the pro-
+       gram's current locale.  If locale is "C" or  "POSIX",  the
+       current locale is set to the portable locale.
+
+       If  locale  is "", the locale is set to the default locale
+       which is selected from the environment variable LANG.
+
+       On startup of the main program, the portable "C" locale is
+       selected as default.
+
+       The  argument  category  determines  which  functions  are
+       influenced by the new locale:
+
+       LC_ALL for all of the locale.
+
+       LC_COLLATE
+              for the functions strcoll() and strxfrm().
+
+       LC_CTYPE
+              for the  character  classification  and  conversion
+              routines.
+
+       LC_MONETARY
+              for localeconv().
+
+       LC_NUMERIC
+              for the decimal character.
+
+       LC_TIME
+              for  strftime().  NULL if the request cannot not be
+              honored.  This string may be  allocated  in  static
+              storage.
+
+       A  program  may be made portable to all locales by calling
+       setlocale(LC_ALL, "" ) after program   initialization,  by
+       using  the  values  returned  from a localeconv() call for
+       locale - dependent information and by using  strcoll()  or
+       strxfrm() to compare strings.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI C, POSIX.1
+
+       Linux  supports  the  portable locales "C" and "POSIX" and
+       also the  European  Latin-1  "ISO-8859-1"  ,  and  Russian
+       "KOI-8" locales.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 18, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SETLOCALE(3)        Linux Programmer's Manual        SETLOCALE(3)
+

+
+       The  printf() family of functions may or may not honor the
+       current locale.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+locale, +localedef, +strcoll, +isalpha, +conv, +strftime, +locale, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 18, 1993                        2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setpgid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setpgid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be5deba --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setpgid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +setpgid + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETPGID(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SETPGID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setpgid, getpgid, setpgrp, getpgrp - set/get process group
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int setpgid(pid_t pid, pid_t pgid);
+       pid_t getpgid(pid_t pid);
+       int setpgrp(void);
+       pid_t getpgrp(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setpgid sets the process group ID of the process specified
+       by  pid  to  pgid.   If pid is zero, the process ID of the
+       current process is used.  If pgid is zero, the process  ID
+       of the process specified by pid is used.
+
+       getpgid returns the process group ID of the process speci-
+       fied by pid.  If pid is zero, the process ID of  the  cur-
+       rent process is used.
+
+       In  the  Linux  DLL  4.4.1  library,  setpgrp simply calls
+       setpgid(0,0).
+
+       getpgrp is equivalent to getpgid(0).
+
+       Process groups are used for distribution of  signals,  and
+       by  terminals  to arbitrate requests for their input: pro-
+       cesses that have the same process group  as  the  terminal
+       are  foreground and may read, while others will block with
+       a signal if they attempt to read.
+
+       These calls are thus used by programs such  as  csh(1)  to
+       create  process  groups  in implementing job control.  The
+       TIOCGPGRP and TIOCSPGRP calls described in termios(4)  are
+       used to get/set the process group of the control terminal.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, setpgid and setpgrp return zero.  On error, -1
+       is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
+
+       getpgid  returns a process group on success.  On error, -1
+       is returned, and errno is set appropriately.
+
+       getpgrp always returns the current process group.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EINVAL  pgid is less than 0.
+
+       EPERM   Various permission violations.
+
+       ESRCH   pid does not match any process.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.4               15 April 1995                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SETPGID(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SETPGID(2)
+

+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getuid, +setsid, +tcsetpgrp, +termios, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.2.4               15 April 1995                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setsid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setsid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..67bc733 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setsid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +setsid + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETSID(2)                  System calls                 SETSID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setsid - creates a session and sets the process group ID
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       pid_t setsid(void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setsid()  creates  a new session if the calling process is
+       not a process group leader.  The calling  process  is  the
+       leader of the new session, the process group leader if the
+       new process group, and has no controlling tty.   The  pro-
+       cess  group ID of the calling process is set to the PID of
+       the calling process.  The calling process will be the only
+       process in this new process group and in this new session.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The process group ID of the calling process.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       On error, -1 will be returned.  The only error  which  can
+       happen is EPERM.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+setpgid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           Aug 27, 1994                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/setuid.htm b/reference/C/MAN/setuid.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6551d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/setuid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +setuid + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETUID(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SETUID(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setuid - set user identity
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int setuid(uid_t uid)
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       setuid  sets the effective user ID of the current process.
+       If the caller is the superuser, the real  and  saved  user
+       ID's are also set.
+
+       Under   Linux,   setuid  is  implemented  like  SYSV  with
+       SAVED_IDS.  This allows a setuid (other than root) program
+       to drop all of it's user privileges, do some un-privileged
+       work, and then re-engage the original effective user ID in
+       a secure manner.
+
+       If the user is root or the program is setuid root, special
+       care must be taken. The setuid function checks the  effec-
+       tive  uid  of  the  caller and if it is the superuser, all
+       process related user ID's are set to uid.  After this  has
+       occurred,  it is impossible for the program to regain root
+       privileges.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EPERM   The  user  is not the super-user, and uid does not
+               match the effective or saved user ID of the  call-
+               ing process.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       System V
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getuid, +setreuid, +seteuid, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.36               29 July 1994                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/signal.htm b/reference/C/MAN/signal.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..112bedd --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/signal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +signal + +
+
+
+
+
+
SIGACTION(2)        Linux Programmer's Manual        SIGACTION(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       signal - ANSI C signal handling.
+
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <signal.h>
+
+
+       void (*signal(int signum, void (*handler)(int)))(int);
+
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  signal  system call installs a new signal handler for
+       signal signum.  The signal handler is set to handler which
+       may be a user specified function, or one of the following:
+
+              SIG_IGN
+                     Ignore the signal.
+
+              SIG_DFL
+                     Reset the signal to its default behavior.
+
+
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       signal returns the previous value of the  signal  handler,
+       or SIG_ERR on error.
+
+
+
NOTES
+
       Signal handlers cannot be set for SIGKILL or SIGSTOP.
+
+       Unlike BSD systems, signals under Linux are reset to their
+       default behavior when raised.
+
+       If you're confused by the prototype at  the  top  of  this
+       manpage, it may help to see it separated out thus:
+
+       typedef void (*sighandler_t)(int);
+       sighandler_t signal(int signum, sighandler_t handler);
+
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       ANSI C
+
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+kill, +kill, +killpg, +pause, +raise, +tion, +signal, +sigsetops, +sigvec, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.0               24 September 1994                       1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/sin.htm b/reference/C/MAN/sin.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..db59b37 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/sin.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +sin + +
+
+
+
+
+
SIN(3)              Linux Programmer's Manual              SIN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       sin - sine function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double sin(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The sin() function returns the sine of x, where x is given
+       in radians.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The sin() function returns a value between -1 and 1.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acos, +asin, +atan, +atan2, +cos, +tan, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/sinh.htm b/reference/C/MAN/sinh.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..22c0660 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/sinh.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +sinh + +
+
+
+
+
+
SINH(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             SINH(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       sinh - hyperbolic sine function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double sinh(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  sinh()  function  returns  the  hyperbolic sine of x,
+       which is defined mathematically as exp(x) - exp(-x) / 2.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acosh, +asinh, +atanh, +cosh, +tanh, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          June 13, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/sleep.htm b/reference/C/MAN/sleep.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aab155f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/sleep.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +sleep + +
+
+
+
+
+
SLEEP(3)            Linux Programmer's Manual            SLEEP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       sleep - Sleep for the specified number of seconds
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       unsigned int sleep(unsigned int seconds);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       sleep() makes the current process sleep until seconds sec-
+       onds have  elapsed  or  a  signal  arrives  which  is  not
+       ignored.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       Zero  if  the requested time has elapsed, or the number of
+       seconds left to sleep.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       sleep() may be implemented using SIGALRM; mixing calls  to
+       alarm() and sleep() is a bad idea.
+
+       Using  longjmp()  from  a  signal handler or modifying the
+       handling of SIGALRM while sleeping  will  cause  undefined
+       results.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+signal, +alarm, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 7, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/sprintf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/sprintf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c029466 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/sprintf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ +sprintf + +
+
+
+
+
+
SPRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SPRINTF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       printf,  fprintf,  sprintf,  vprintf, vfprintf, vsprintf -
+       formatted output conversion
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int printf( const char *format, ...);
+       int fprintf( FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);
+       int sprintf( char *str, const char *format, ...);
+
+       #include <stdarg.h>
+
+       int vprintf( const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vfprintf( FILE *stream, const  char  *format,  va_list
+       ap);
+       int vsprintf( char *str, char *format, va_list ap);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  printf  family of functions produces output according
+       to a format as described below.  Printf and vprintf  write
+       output  to stdout, the standard output stream; fprintf and
+       vfprintf write output to the given output stream; sprintf,
+       and  vsprintf  write  to  the character string str.  These
+       functions write the output under the control of  a  format
+       string  that  specifies how subsequent arguments (or argu-
+       ments accessed via the variable-length argument facilities
+       of  stdarg(3)  are  converted for output.  These functions
+       return the number of characters printed (not including the
+       trailing `\0' used to end output to strings).
+
+       The  format string is composed of zero or more directives:
+       ordinary characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to
+       the  output stream; and conversion specifications, each of
+       which results in fetching zero or  more  subsequent  argu-
+       ments.  Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+       character  %.   The  arguments  must  correspond  properly
+       (after  type  promotion)  with  the  conversion specifier.
+       After the %, the following appear in sequence:
+
+       o      Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+              #      specifying that the  value  should  be  con-
+                     verted  to an ``alternate form''.  For c, d,
+                     i, n, p, s, and u conversions,  this  option
+                     has  no effect.  For o conversions, the pre-
+                     cision of the number is increased  to  force
+                     the  first character of the output string to
+                     a zero (except if a zero  value  is  printed
+                     with  an explicit precision of zero).  For x
+                     and X conversions, a non-zero result has the
+                     string  `0x'  (or  `0X'  for  X conversions)
+                     prepended to it.  For e, E, f, g, and G con-
+                     versions,  the  result will always contain a
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SPRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SPRINTF(3)
+

+
+                     decimal point, even if no digits  follow  it
+                     (normally,  a  decimal  point appears in the
+                     results of those conversions only if a digit
+                     follows).  For g and G conversions, trailing
+                     zeros are not removed  from  the  result  as
+                     they would otherwise be.
+
+              0      specifying  zero  padding.   For all conver-
+                     sions  except  n,  the  converted  value  is
+                     padded  on  the  left with zeros rather than
+                     blanks.  If a  precision  is  given  with  a
+                     numeric  conversion  (d,  i, o, u, i, x, and
+                     X), the 0 flag is ignored.
+
+              -      (a negative field width flag) indicates  the
+                     converted  value  is  to be left adjusted on
+                     the field boundary.  Except  for  n  conver-
+                     sions,  the converted value is padded on the
+                     right with blanks, rather than on  the  left
+                     with  blanks or zeros.  A - overrides a 0 if
+                     both are given.
+
+                     (a space) specifying that a blank should  be
+                     left  before a positive number produced by a
+                     signed conversion (d, e, E, f, g, G, or  i).
+
+              +      specifying  that  a  sign  always  be placed
+                     before a number produced by a signed conver-
+                     sion.   A  +  overrides  a space if both are
+                     used.
+
+       o      An optional decimal digit string specifying a mini-
+              mum  field width.  If the converted value has fewer
+              characters than the field width, it will be  padded
+              with  spaces  on  the  left (or right, if the left-
+              adjustment flag has been given)  to  fill  out  the
+              field width.
+
+       o      An  optional  precision,  in  the  form of a period
+              (`.')  followed by an optional  digit  string.   If
+              the digit string is omitted, the precision is taken
+              as zero.  This gives the minimum number  of  digits
+              to appear for d, i, o, u, x, and X conversions, the
+              number of digits to appear after the  decimal-point
+              for  e, E, and f conversions, the maximum number of
+              significant digits for g and G conversions, or  the
+              maximum  number  of characters to be printed from a
+              string for s conversions.
+
+       o      The optional character h, specifying that a follow-
+              ing d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion corresponds to a
+              short int or unsigned short int argument, or that a
+              following  n conversion corresponds to a pointer to
+              a short int argument.
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+
+
+
SPRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SPRINTF(3)
+

+
+       o      The optional character l (ell)  specifying  that  a
+              following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion applies to
+              a pointer to a long int or unsigned long int  argu-
+              ment,  or that a following n conversion corresponds
+              to a pointer to a long int argument.
+
+       o      The character L specifying that a following  e,  E,
+              f,  g, or G conversion corresponds to a long double
+              argument.
+
+       o      A character that specifies the type  of  conversion
+              to be applied.
+
+       A  field  width or precision, or both, may be indicated by
+       an asterisk `*' instead of a digit string.  In this  case,
+       an  int argument supplies the field width or precision.  A
+       negative field width is treated as a left adjustment  flag
+       followed  by  a positive field width; a negative precision
+       is treated as though it were missing.
+
+       The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+       diouxX The int (or appropriate variant) argument  is  con-
+              verted  to signed decimal (d and i), unsigned octal
+              (o, unsigned decimal (u, or unsigned hexadecimal (x
+              and X) notation.  The letters abcdef are used for x
+              conversions; the letters ABCDEF are used for X con-
+              versions.  The precision, if any, gives the minimum
+              number of digits that must appear; if the converted
+              value  requires  fewer  digits, it is padded on the
+              left with zeros.
+
+       DOU    The long int argument is converted to signed  deci-
+              mal, unsigned octal, or unsigned decimal, as if the
+              format had been ld, lo, or lu respectively.   These
+              conversion  characters  are  deprecated,  and  will
+              eventually disappear.
+
+       eE     The double argument is rounded and converted in the
+              style  [-]d.dddedd  where there is one digit before
+              the decimal-point character and the number of  dig-
+              its after it is equal to the precision; if the pre-
+              cision is missing, it is taken as 6; if the  preci-
+              sion  is  zero, no decimal-point character appears.
+              An E conversion uses the letter E (rather  than  e)
+              to  introduce  the  exponent.   The exponent always
+              contains at least two digits; if the value is zero,
+              the exponent is 00.
+
+       f      The  double  argument  is  rounded and converted to
+              decimal notation in the style [-]ddd.ddd, where the
+              number  of digits after the decimal-point character
+              is equal to the precision  specification.   If  the
+              precision  is  missing,  it  is  taken as 6; if the
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       3
+

+
+
+
+
+
SPRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SPRINTF(3)
+

+
+              precision  is  explicitly  zero,  no  decimal-point
+              character  appears.  If a decimal point appears, at
+              least one digit appears before it.
+
+       g      The double argument is converted in style  f  or  e
+              (or  E for G conversions).  The precision specifies
+              the number of significant digits.  If the precision
+              is missing, 6 digits are given; if the precision is
+              zero, it is treated as 1.  Style e is used  if  the
+              exponent  from  its  conversion  is less than -4 or
+              greater than or equal to the  precision.   Trailing
+              zeros  are  removed from the fractional part of the
+              result; a decimal point appears only if it is  fol-
+              lowed by at least one digit.
+
+       c      The  int argument is converted to an unsigned char,
+              and the resulting character is written.
+
+       s      The ``char *'' argument is expected to be a pointer
+              to  an  array  of  character  type  (pointer  to  a
+              string).  Characters from the array are written  up
+              to (but not including) a terminating NUL character;
+              if a precision is specified, no more than the  num-
+              ber  specified  are  written.   If  a  precision is
+              given, no null character need be  present;  if  the
+              precision  is not specified, or is greater than the
+              size of the array, the array must contain a  termi-
+              nating NUL character.
+
+       p      The  ``void *'' pointer argument is printed in hex-
+              adecimal (as if by %#x or %#lx).
+
+       n      The number of characters written so far  is  stored
+              into  the  integer  indicated  by the ``int *'' (or
+              variant) pointer argument.   No  argument  is  con-
+              verted.
+
+       %      A  `%'  is  written.  No argument is converted. The
+              complete conversion specification is `%%'.
+
+       In no case does a non-existent or small field width  cause
+       truncation  of  a  field; if the result of a conversion is
+       wider than the field width, the field is expanded to  con-
+       tain the conversion result.
+
+
+
EXAMPLES
+
       To  print  a  date  and  time in the form `Sunday, July 3,
+       10:02', where weekday and month are pointers to strings:
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              fprintf(stdout, "%s, %s %d, %.2d:%.2d\n",
+                   weekday, month, day, hour, min);
+
+       To print to five decimal places:
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       4
+

+
+
+
+
+
SPRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SPRINTF(3)
+

+
+              #include <math.h>
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              fprintf(stdout, "pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
+
+       To allocate a 128 byte string and print into it:
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              #include <stdlib.h>
+              #include <stdarg.h>
+              char *newfmt(const char *fmt, ...)
+              {
+                        char *p;
+                        va_list ap;
+                        if ((p = malloc(128)) == NULL)
+                             return (NULL);
+                        va_start(ap, fmt);
+                        (void) vsnprintf(p, 128, fmt, ap);
+                        va_end(ap);
+                        return (p);
+              }
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+printf, +scanf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fprintf,  printf,  sprintf,  vprintf,  vfprintf,  and
+       vsprintf  functions  conform  to  ANSI C3.159-1989 (``ANSI
+       C'').
+
+
BUGS
+
       Some floating point conversions under Linux  cause  memory
+       leaks.
+
+       The conversion formats %D, %O, and %U are not standard and
+       are provided only for backward compatibility.   These  may
+       not be provided under Linux.
+
+       The  effect of padding the %p format with zeros (either by
+       the 0 flag or by specifying a precision), and  the  benign
+       effect  (i.e.,  none)  of  the # flag on %n and %p conver-
+       sions, as well as other nonsensical combinations  such  as
+       %Ld,   are  not  standard;  such  combinations  should  be
+       avoided.
+
+       Because sprintf and vsprintf  assume  an  infinitely  long
+       string, callers must be careful not to overflow the actual
+       space; this is often impossible to assure.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       5
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/sqrt.htm b/reference/C/MAN/sqrt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..68ac1cf --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/sqrt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +sqrt + +
+
+
+
+
+
SQRT(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             SQRT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       sqrt - square root function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double sqrt(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  sqrt()  function returns the non-negative square root
+       of x.  It fails and sets errno to EDOM, if x is  negative.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EDOM   x is negative.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+hypot, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          June 21, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/stat.htm b/reference/C/MAN/stat.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..37ba91b --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/stat.htm @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ +stat + +
+
+
+
+
+
STAT(2)             Linux Programmer's Manual             STAT(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       stat, fstat, lstat - get file status
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/stat.h>
+       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int stat(const char *file_name, struct stat *buf);
+       int fstat(int filedes, struct stat *buf);
+       int lstat(const char *file_name, struct stat *buf);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       These  functions  return  information  about the specified
+       file.  You do not need any access rights to  the  file  to
+       get  this  information  but  you need search rights to all
+       directories named in the path leading to the file.
+
+       stat stats the file pointed to by file_name and  fills  in
+       buf.
+
+       lstat  is  identical  to  stat,  only  the  link itself is
+       stated, not the file  that  is  obtained  by  tracing  the
+       links.
+
+       fstat  is identical to stat, only the open file pointed to
+       by filedes (as returned by fopen(3) ) is stated  in  place
+       of file_name.
+
+
+       They  all  return  a  stat structure, which is declared as
+       follows:
+
+              struct stat
+              {
+                  dev_t         st_dev;      /* device */
+                  ino_t         st_ino;      /* inode */
+                  umode_t       st_mode;     /* protection */
+                  nlink_t       st_nlink;    /* number of hard links */
+                  uid_t         st_uid;      /* user ID of owner */
+                  gid_t         st_gid;      /* group ID of owner */
+                  dev_t         st_rdev;     /* device type (if inode device) */
+                  off_t         st_size;     /* total size, in bytes */
+                  unsigned long st_blksize;  /* blocksize for filesystem I/O */
+                  unsigned long st_blocks;   /* number of blocks allocated */
+                  time_t        st_atime;    /* time of last access */
+                  time_t        st_mtime;    /* time of last modification */
+                  time_t        st_ctime;    /* time of last change */
+              };
+
+       Note that st_blocks may not always be in terms  of  blocks
+       of  size  st_blksize, and that st_blksize may instead pro-
+       vide a notion of the "preferred" blocksize  for  efficient
+       file system I/O.
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.75              1 January 1995                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
STAT(2)             Linux Programmer's Manual             STAT(2)
+

+
+       Not all of the Linux filesystems implement all of the time
+       fields.  Traditionally, st_atime is changed  by  mknod(2),
+       utime(2), read(2), write(2), and truncate(2).
+
+       Traditionally,  st_mtime is changed by mknod(2), utime(2),
+       and write(2).  The st_mtime is not changed for changes  in
+       owner, group, hard link count, or mode.
+
+       Traditionally,  st_ctime  is changed by writing or by set-
+       ting inode information (i.e., owner,  group,  link  count,
+       mode, etc.).
+
+       The following macros are defined to check the file type:
+
+              S_ISLNK(m)  is it a symbolic link
+
+              S_ISREG(m)  regular file
+
+              S_ISDIR(m)  directory
+
+              S_ISCHR(m)  character device
+
+              S_ISBLK(m)  block device
+
+              S_ISFIFO(m) fifo
+
+              S_ISSOCK(m) socket
+
+       The following flags are defined for the st_mode field:
+
+              S_IFMT   00170000  bitmask  for  the file type bit-
+                       fields
+
+              S_IFSOCK 0140000 socket
+
+              S_IFLNK  0120000 symbolic link
+
+              S_IFREG  0100000 regular file
+
+              S_IFBLK  0060000 block device
+
+              S_IFDIR  0040000 directory
+
+              S_IFCHR  0020000 character device
+
+              S_IFIFO  0010000 fifo
+
+              S_ISUID  0004000 set UID bit
+
+              S_ISGID  0002000 set GID bit
+
+              S_ISVTX  0001000 sticky bit
+
+              S_IRWXU  00700 user (file owner)  has  read,  write
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.75              1 January 1995                        2
+

+
+
+
+
+
STAT(2)             Linux Programmer's Manual             STAT(2)
+

+
+                       and execute permission
+
+              S_IRUSR (S_IREAD)
+                       00400 user has read permission
+
+              S_IWUSR (S_IWRITE)
+                       00200 user has write permission
+
+              S_IXUSR (S_IEXEC)
+                       00100 user has execute permission
+
+              S_IRWXG  00070  group  has  read, write and execute
+                       permission
+
+              S_IRGRP  00040 group has read permission
+
+              S_IWGRP  00020 group has write permission
+
+              S_IXGRP  00010 group has execute permission
+
+              S_IRWXO  00007 others have read, write and  execute
+                       permission
+
+              S_IROTH  00004 others have read permission
+
+              S_IWOTH  00002 others have write permisson
+
+              S_IXOTH  00001 others have execute permission
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On  success,  zero is returned.  On error, -1 is returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF   filedes is bad.
+
+       ENOENT  File does not exist.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID  (not  lstat()),  AT&T  (not  lstat()),  POSIX   (not
+       lstat()), X/OPEN (not lstat()), BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+chmod, +chown, +readlink, +utime, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 1.1.75              1 January 1995                        3
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/stderr.htm b/reference/C/MAN/stderr.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a04473 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/stderr.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +strerror + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRERROR(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         STRERROR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strerror - return string describing error code
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       char *strerror(int errnum);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  strerror()  function  returns a string describing the
+       error code passed in the argument errno.  The  string  can
+       only be used until the next call to strerror().
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  strerror()  function returns the appropriate descrip-
+       tion string, or an unknown error message if the error code
+       is unknown.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+errno, +perror, +strsignal, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 13, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strcasecmp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strcasecmp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9267d41 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strcasecmp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +strcasecmp + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRCASECMP(3)       Linux Programmer's Manual       STRCASECMP(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strcasecmp,  strncasecmp  -  compare  two strings ignoring
+       case
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       int strcasecmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
+
+       int strncasecmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The strcasecmp() function compares the two strings s1  and
+       s2,  ignoring  the  case of the characters.  It returns an
+       integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if s1 is
+       found,  respectively,  to  be  less  than, to match, or be
+       greater than s2.
+
+       The strncasecmp() function is similar, except it only com-
+       pares the first n characters of s1.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  strcasecmp()  and  strncasecmp()  functions return an
+       integer less than, equal to, or greater than  zero  if  s1
+       (or  the first n bytes thereof) is found, respectively, to
+       be less than, to match, or be greater than s2.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bcmp, +memcmp, +strcmp, +strcoll, +strncmp, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          April 11, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strcat.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strcat.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..209b597 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strcat.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +strcat + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRCAT(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STRCAT(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strcat, strncat - concatenate two strings
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       char *strcat(char *dest, const char *src);
+
+       char *strncat(char *dest, const char *src, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  strcat()  function appends the src string to the dest
+       string overwriting the `\0' character at the end of  dest,
+       and  then  adds a terminating `\0' character.  The strings
+       may not overlap, and the  dest  string  must  have  enough
+       space for the result.
+
+       The  strncat()  function  is similar, except that only the
+       first n characters of src are appended to dest.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The strcat() and strncat() functions return a  pointer  to
+       the resulting string dest.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bcopy, +memccpy, +memcpy, +strcpy, +strncpy, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 11, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strcoll.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strcoll.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..043f740 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strcoll.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +strcoll + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRCOLL(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          STRCOLL(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strcoll - compare two strings using the current locale
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The strcoll() function compares the two strings s1 and s2.
+       It returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than
+       zero  if  s1  is  found, respectively, to be less than, to
+       match, or be greater than s2.  The comparison is based  on
+       strings  interpreted as appropriate for the program's cur-
+       rent locale for category LC_COLLATE.  (See  setlocale(3)).
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The strcoll() function returns an integer less than, equal
+       to, or greater than zero if s1 is found, respectively,  to
+       be  less  than, to match, or be greater than s2, when both
+       are interpreted as appropriate for the current locale.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
NOTES
+
       The Linux C Library currently hasn't implemented the  com-
+       plete POSIX-collating.
+
+       In  the  "POSIX" or "C" locales strcoll() is equivalent to
+       strcmp().
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bcmp, +memcmp, +strcasecmp, +strcmp, +strxfrm, +setlocale, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 12, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strcspn.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strcspn.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3124e7a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strcspn.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +strcspn + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRSPN(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STRSPN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strspn, strcspn - search a string for a set of characters
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       size_t strspn(const char *s, const char *accept);
+
+       size_t strcspn(const char *s, const char *reject);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The strspn() function calculates the length of the initial
+       segment of s which  consists  entirely  of  characters  in
+       accept.
+
+       The  strcspn()  function calculates the length of the ini-
+       tial segment of s which consists  entirely  of  characters
+       not in reject.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  strspn() function returns the number of characters in
+       the initial segment of s which consist only of  characters
+       from accept.
+
+       The strcspn() function returns the number of characters in
+       the initial segment of s  which  are  not  in  the  string
+       reject.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+index, +memchr, +rindex, +strchr, +strpbrk, +strsep, +strstr, +strtok, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          April 12, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strftime.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strftime.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7154eae --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strftime.htm @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +strftime + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRFTIME(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         STRFTIME(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strftime - format date and time
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <time.h>
+
+       size_t strftime(char *s, size_t max, const char *format,
+                           const struct tm *tm);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  strftime()  function  formats the broken-down time tm
+       according to the format specification  format  and  places
+       the result in the character array s of size max.
+
+       Ordinary characters placed in the format string are copied
+       to s without conversion.  Conversion specifiers are intro-
+       duced  by  a  `%' character, and are replaced in s as fol-
+       lows:
+
+       %a     The abbreviated weekday name according to the  cur-
+              rent locale.
+
+       %A     The  full  weekday  name  according  to the current
+              locale.
+
+       %b     The abbreviated month name according to the current
+              locale.
+
+       %B     The  full  month  name  according  to  the  current
+              locale.
+
+       %c     The preferred date and time representation for  the
+              current locale.
+
+       %d     The  day  of the month as a decimal number (range 0
+              to 31).
+
+       %H     The hour as a decimal number using a 24-hour  clock
+              (range 00 to 23).
+
+       %I     The  hour as a decimal number using a 12-hour clock
+              (range 01 to 12).
+
+       %j     The day of the year as a decimal number (range  001
+              to 366).
+
+       %m     The month as a decimal number (range 10 to 12).
+
+       %M     The minute as a decimal number.
+
+       %p     Either  `am'  or  `pm'  according to the given time
+              value, or the corresponding strings for the current
+              locale.
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        July 2, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
STRFTIME(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         STRFTIME(3)
+

+
+       %S     The second as a decimal number.
+
+       %U     The  week  number  of the current year as a decimal
+              number, starting with the first Sunday as the first
+              day of the first week.
+
+       %W     The  week  number  of the current year as a decimal
+              number, starting with the first Monday as the first
+              day of the first week.
+
+       %w     The day of the week as a decimal, Sunday being 0.
+
+       %x     The  preferred  date representation for the current
+              locale without the time.
+
+       %X     The preferred time representation for  the  current
+              locale without the date.
+
+       %y     The  year  as  a  decimal  number without a century
+              (range 00 to 99).
+
+       %Y     The year as a decimal number including the century.
+
+       %Z     The time zone or name or abbreviation.
+
+       %%     A literal `%' character.
+
+       The  broken-down  time structure tm is defined in <time.h>
+       as follows:
+
+              struct tm
+              {
+                      int     tm_sec;         /* seconds */
+                      int     tm_min;         /* minutes */
+                      int     tm_hour;        /* hours */
+                      int     tm_mday;        /* day of the month */
+                      int     tm_mon;         /* month */
+                      int     tm_year;        /* year */
+                      int     tm_wday;        /* day of the week */
+                      int     tm_yday;        /* day in the year */
+                      int     tm_isdst;       /* daylight saving time */
+              };
+
+       The members of the tm structure are:
+
+       tm_sec The number of seconds after the minute, normally in
+              the range 0 to 59, but can be up to 61 to allow for
+              leap seconds.
+
+       tm_min The number of minutes after the hour, in the  range
+              0 to 59.
+
+       tm_hour
+              The  number  of hours past midnight, in the range 0
+
+
+
+
GNU                        July 2, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+
+
+
STRFTIME(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         STRFTIME(3)
+

+
+              to 23.
+
+       tm_mday
+              The day of the month, in the range 1 to 31.
+
+       tm_mon The number of months since January, in the range  0
+              to 11.
+
+       tm_year
+              The number of years since 1900.
+
+       tm_wday
+              The  number of days since Sunday, in the range 0 to
+              6.
+
+       tm_yday
+              The number of days since January 1, in the range  0
+              to 365.
+
+       tm_isdst
+              A  flag that indicates whether daylight saving time
+              is in effect at the time described.  The  value  is
+              positive if daylight saving time is in effect, zero
+              if it is not, and negative if  the  information  is
+              not available.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  strftime()  function returns the number of characters
+       placed in the array s, not including the terminating  NULL
+       character.   If  the  value  equals max, it means that the
+       array was too small.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+date, +time, +ctime, +setlocale, +sprintf, +

+
+
NOTES
+
       The function supports  only  those  locales  specified  in
+       locale(7)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                        July 2, 1993                         3
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strlen.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strlen.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea7334a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strlen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +strlen + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRLEN(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STRLEN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strlen - calculate the length of a string
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       size_t strlen(const char *s);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  strlen() function calculates the length of the string
+       s, not including the terminating `\0' character.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The strlen() function returns the number of characters  in
+       s.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+string, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          April 12, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strpbrk.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strpbrk.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..008b98b --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strpbrk.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +strpbrk + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRPBRK(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          STRPBRK(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strpbrk - search a string for any of a set of characters
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       char *strpbrk(const char *s, const char *accept);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The strpbrk() function locates the first occurrence in the
+       string s of any of the characters in the string accept.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The strpbrk() function returns a pointer to the  character
+       in s that matches one of the characters in accept.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+index, +memchr, +rindex, +strchr, +strsep, +spn, +strstr, +strtok, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          April 12, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strspn.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strspn.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3eacb54 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strspn.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +strspn + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRSPN(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STRSPN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strspn, strcspn - search a string for a set of characters
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       size_t strspn(const char *s, const char *accept);
+
+       size_t strcspn(const char *s, const char *reject);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The strspn() function calculates the length of the initial
+       segment of s which  consists  entirely  of  characters  in
+       accept.
+
+       The  strcspn()  function calculates the length of the ini-
+       tial segment of s which consists  entirely  of  characters
+       not in reject.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  strspn() function returns the number of characters in
+       the initial segment of s which consist only of  characters
+       from accept.
+
+       The strcspn() function returns the number of characters in
+       the initial segment of s  which  are  not  in  the  string
+       reject.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+index, +memchr, +rindex, +strchr, +strpbrk, +strsep, +strstr, +strtok, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          April 12, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strstr.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strstr.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e0ca0d --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strstr.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +strstr + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRSTR(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STRSTR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strstr - locate a substring
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <string.h>
+
+       char *strstr(const char *haystack, const char *needle);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  strstr()  function  finds the first occurrence of the
+       substring needle in the string haystack.  The  terminating
+       `\0' characters are not compared.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  strstr()  function returns a pointer to the beginning
+       of the substring, or NULL if the substring is not found.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+index, +memchr, +rindex, +strchr, +strpbrk, +strsep, +strspn, +strtok, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 12, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/strtod.htm b/reference/C/MAN/strtod.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d32acee --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/strtod.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +strtod + +
+
+
+
+
+
STRTOD(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STRTOD(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       strtod - convert ASCII string to double
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       double strtod(const char *nptr, char **endptr
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  strtod  function  converts the initial portion of the
+       string pointed to by nptr to double representation.
+
+       The expected form  of  the  string  is  an  optional  plus
+       (``+'')  or  minus  sign (``-'') followed by a sequence of
+       digits optionally containing  a  decimal-point  character,
+       optionally  followed by an exponent.  An exponent consists
+       of an ``E'' or ``e'', followed  by  an  optional  plus  or
+       minus sign, followed by a sequence of digits.
+
+       Leading  white-space  characters in the string (as defined
+       by the isspace(3) function) are skipped.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       The strtod function returns the converted value, if any.
+
+       If endptr is not NULL, a pointer to  the  character  after
+       the last character used in the conversion is stored in the
+       location referenced by endptr.
+
+       If no conversion is performed, zero is  returned  and  the
+       value  of  nptr  is  stored  in the location referenced by
+       endptr.
+
+       If the correct value would cause overflow, plus  or  minus
+       HUGE_VAL is returned (according to the sign of the value),
+       and ERANGE is stored in errno.  If the correct value would
+       cause  underflow, zero is returned and ERANGE is stored in
+       errno.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       ERANGE Overflow or underflow occurred.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+atof, +atoi, +atol, +strtol, +strtoul, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The strtod function conforms to ANSI-C.
+
+
BUGS
+
       This is a BSD manual page and may not reflect the  current
+       Linux implementation.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD Man Page               21 Aug 1994                          1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/sysconf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/sysconf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f09ca21 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/sysconf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +sysconf + +
+
+
+
+
+
SYSCONF(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SYSCONF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       sysconf - Get configuration information at runtime
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       long sysconf(int name);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       sysconf()  provides a way for the application to determine
+       values for system limits or options at runtime.
+
+       The equivalent macros defined in <unistd.h> can only  give
+       conservative  values;  if  an  application  wants  to take
+       advantage of values which may change, a call to  sysconf()
+       can be made, which may yield more liberal results.
+
+       For  getting  information  about  a  particular  file, see
+       fpathconf() or pathconf().
+
+       The following values are supported for name.   First,  the
+       POSIX.1 compatible values:
+
+       _SC_ARG_MAX
+              The  maximum  length of the arguments to the exec()
+              family of functions;  the  corresponding  macro  is
+              ARG_MAX.
+
+       _SC_CHILD_MAX
+              The  number  of simultaneous processes per user id,
+              the corresponding macro is _POSIX_CHILD_MAX.
+
+       _SC_CLK_TCK
+              The number of clock ticks per  second;  the  corre-
+              sponding macro is CLK_TCK.
+
+       _SC_STREAM_MAX
+              The  maximum  number  of streams that a process can
+              have open at any  time.   The  corresponding  POSIX
+              macro  is  STREAM_MAX, the corresponding standard C
+              macro is FOPEN_MAX.
+
+       _SC_TZNAME_MAX
+              The maximum number of bytes in a timezone name, the
+              corresponding macro is TZNAME_MAX.
+
+       _SC_OPEN_MAX
+              The maximum number of files that a process can have
+              open  at  any  time,  the  corresponding  macro  is
+              _POSIX_OPEN_MAX.
+
+       _SC_JOB_CONTROL
+              This indicates whether POSIX - style job control is
+              supported,    the    corresponding     macro     is
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 18, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+
+
+
SYSCONF(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SYSCONF(3)
+

+
+              _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL.
+
+       _SC_SAVED_IDS
+              This  indicates  whether a process has a saved set-
+              user-ID and a saved set-group-ID; the corresponding
+              macro is _POSIX_SAVED_IDS.
+
+       _SC_VERSION
+              indicates  the  year and month the POSIX.1 standard
+              was  approved  in  the  format  YYYYMML;the   value
+              199009L indicates the most recent revision, 1990.
+
+       Next, the POSIX.2 values:
+
+       _SC_BC_BASE_MAX
+              indicates  the  maximum obase value accepted by the
+              bc(1)   utility;   the   corresponding   macro   is
+              BC_BASE_MAX.
+
+       _SC_BC_DIM_MAX
+              indicates  the  maximum value of elements permitted
+              in an array by bc(1); the  corresponding  macro  is
+              BC_DIM_MAX.
+
+       _SC_BC_SCALE_MAX
+              indicates the maximum scale value allowed by bc(1);
+              the corresponding macro is BC_SCALE_MAX.
+
+       _SC_BC_STRING_MAX
+              indicates the maximum length of a  string  accepted
+              by bc(1); the corresponding macro is BC_STRING_MAX.
+
+       _SC_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
+              indicates the maximum numbers of weights  that  can
+              be  assigned  to  an  entry of the LC_COLLATE order
+              keyword in the locale definition file;  the  corre-
+              sponding macro is COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX.
+
+       _SC_EXPR_NEST_MAX
+              is  the  maximum number of expressions which can be
+              nested within parentheses by expr(1).   The  corre-
+              sponding macro is EXPR_NEST_MAX.
+
+       _SC_LINE_MAX
+              The  maximum  length  of  a  utility's  input  line
+              length, either from standard input or from a  file.
+              This  includes  length for a trailing newline.  The
+              corresponding macro is LINE_MAX.
+
+       _SC_RE_DUP_MAX
+              The maximum number of  repeated  occurrences  of  a
+              regular   expression  when  the  interval  notation
+              \{m,n\} is used. The  value  of  the  corresponding
+              macro is RE_DUP_MAX.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 18, 1993                        2
+

+
+
+
+
+
SYSCONF(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          SYSCONF(3)
+

+
+       _SC_2_VERSION
+              indicates  the  version  of the POSIX.2 standard in
+              the format of YYYYMML.  The corresponding macro  is
+              POSIX2_VERSION.
+
+       _SC_2_DEV
+              indicates  whether  the POSIX.2 C language develop-
+              ment facilities are supported.   The  corresponding
+              macro is POSIX2_C_DEV.
+
+       _SC_2_FORT_DEV
+              indicates  whether  the POSIX.2 FORTRAN development
+              utilities are supported.  The  corresponding  macro
+              is POSIX2_FORT_RUN.
+
+       _SC_2_FORT_RUN
+              indicates whether the POSIX.2 FORTRAN runtime util-
+              ities are supported.  The  corresponding  macro  is
+              POSIX2_FORT_RUN.
+
+       POSIX2_LOCALEDEF
+              indicates  whether  the POSIX.2 creation of locates
+              via  locale(1)  is  supported.   The  corresponding
+              macro is POSIX2_LOCALEDEF.
+
+       _SC_2_SW_DEV
+              indicates  whether the POSIX.2 software development
+              utilities option is supported.   The  corresponding
+              macro is POSIX2_SW_DEV.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  value returned is the value of the system resource, 1
+       if a queried option is available, 0 if it is not, or -1 on
+       error.  The variable errno is not set.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       POSIX.1, proposed POSIX.2
+
+
BUGS
+
       It  is  difficult  use ARG_MAX because it is not specified
+       how much of the argument space for exec() is  consumed  by
+       the user's environment variables.
+
+       Some  returned  values  may be huge; they are not suitable
+       for allocating memory.
+
+       POSIX.2 is not yet an approved standard;  the  information
+       in this manpage is subject to change.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+bc, +expr, +locale, +fpathconf, +pathconf, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 18, 1993                        3
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/tan.htm b/reference/C/MAN/tan.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..755afba --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/tan.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +tan + +
+
+
+
+
+
TAN(3)              Linux Programmer's Manual              TAN(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       tan - tangent function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double tan(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  tan()  function  returns the tangent of x, where x is
+       given in radians.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acos, +asin, +atan, +atan2, +cos, +sin, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                           June 8, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/tanh.htm b/reference/C/MAN/tanh.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4adcce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/tanh.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +tanh + +
+
+
+
+
+
TANH(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             TANH(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       tanh - hyperbolic tangent function
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <math.h>
+
+       double tanh(double x);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  tanh()  function returns the hyperbolic tangent of x,
+       which is defined mathematically as sinh(x) / cosh(x).
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+acosh, +asinh, +atanh, +cosh, +sinh, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          June 13, 1993                         1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/telldir.htm b/reference/C/MAN/telldir.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc8308f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/telldir.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +telldir + +
+
+
+
+
+
TELLDIR(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TELLDIR(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       telldir - return current location in directory stream.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <dirent.h>
+
+       off_t telldir(DIR *dir);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  telldir() function returns the current location asso-
+       ciated with the directory stream dir.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The telldir() function returns the current location in the
+       directory stream or -1 if an error occurs.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EBADF  Invalid directory stream descriptor dir.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+opendir, +readdir, +closedir, +rewinddir, +seekdir, +scandir, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                          March 31, 1993                        1
+
+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/test b/reference/C/MAN/test new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b08ea81 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/test @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ + + + .htm + .htm diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/time.htm b/reference/C/MAN/time.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1c382b --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/time.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +time + +
+
+
+
+
+
TIME(2)             Linux Programmer's Manual             TIME(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       time - get time in seconds
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <time.h>
+
+       time_t time(time_t *t);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       time returns the time since 00:00:00 GMT, January 1, 1970,
+       measured in seconds.
+
+       If t is non null, the return value is also stored  in  the
+       memory pointed to by t.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+       Under  BSD 4.3, this call is obsoleted by gettimeofday(2).
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+ctime, +date, +ftime, +gettimeofday, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                      24 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/tmpfile.htm b/reference/C/MAN/tmpfile.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b87aeae --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/tmpfile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +tmpfile + +
+
+
+
+
+
TMPFILE(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TMPFILE(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       tmpfile - create a temporary file
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       FILE *tmpfile (void);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  tmpfile() function generates a unique temporary file-
+       name using the path prefix P_tmpdir defined in  <stdio.h>.
+       The  temporary  file  is  then opened in binary read/write
+       (w+b) mode.  The file will be automatically  deleted  when
+       it is closed or the program terminates.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  tmpfile()  function  returns  a stream descriptor, or
+       NULL if a unique  filename  cannot  be  generated  or  the
+       unique file cannot be opened.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EACCES Search  permission  denied  for directory in file's
+              path prefix.
+
+       EEXIST Unable to generate a unique filename.
+
+       EMFILE Too many file descriptors in use by process.
+
+       ENFILE Too many files open in system.
+
+       EROFS  Read-only filesystem.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mktemp, +mkstemp, +tmpnam, +tempnam, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 3, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/tmpnam.htm b/reference/C/MAN/tmpnam.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9af953 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/tmpnam.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +tmpnam + +
+
+
+
+
+
TMPNAM(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           TMPNAM(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       tmpnam - create a name for a temporary file
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       char *tmpnam(char *s);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  tmpnam()  function generates a unique temporary file-
+       name using the path prefix P_tmpdir defined in  <stdio.h>.
+       If the argument s is NULL, tmpnam() returns the address of
+       an internal static area which holds the filename, which is
+       overwritten  by subsequent calls to tmpnam().  If s is not
+       NULL, the filename is returned in s.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The tmpnam() function returns a pointer to the unique tem-
+       porary filename, or NULL if a unique name cannot be gener-
+       ated.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EEXIST Unable to generate a unique filename.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mktemp, +mkstemp, +tempnam, +tmpfile, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 3, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/togetpgrp.htm b/reference/C/MAN/togetpgrp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..68d9c8c --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/togetpgrp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,492 @@ +tcgetpgrp + +
+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       termios,   tcgetattr,   tcsetattr,  tcsendbreak,  tcdrain,
+       tcflush, tcflow,  cfgetospeed,  cfgetispeed,  cfsetispeed,
+       cfsetospeed,  tcgetpgrp,  tcsetpgrp - get and set terminal
+       attributes, line control, get and set baud rate,  get  and
+       set terminal foreground process group ID
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <termios.h>
+       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int tcgetattr ( int fd, struct termios *termios_p );
+
+       int tcsetattr ( int fd, int optional_actions, struct
+       termios *termios_p );
+
+       int tcsendbreak ( int fd, int duration );
+
+       int tcdrain ( int fd );
+
+       int tcflush ( int fd, int queue_selector );
+
+       int tcflow ( int fd, int action );
+
+       speed_t cfgetospeed ( struct termios *termios_p );
+
+       int cfsetospeed ( struct termios *termios_p, speed_t speed
+       );
+
+       speed_t cfgetispeed ( struct termios *termios_p );
+
+       int cfsetispeed ( struct termios *termios_p, speed_t speed
+       );
+
+       pid_t tcgetpgrp ( int fd );
+
+       int tcsetpgrp ( int fd, pid_t pgrpid );
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The termios functions describe a general  terminal  inter-
+       face  that  is provided to control asynchronous communica-
+       tions ports.
+
+       Many of the functions  described  here  have  a  termios_p
+       argument  that  is a pointer to a termios structure.  This
+       structure contains the following members:
+
+              tcflag_t c_iflag;      /* input modes */
+              tcflag_t c_oflag;      /* output modes */
+              tcflag_t c_cflag;      /* control modes */
+              tcflag_t c_lflag;      /* local modes */
+              cc_t c_cc[NCCS];       /* control chars */
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+       c_iflag flag constants:
+
+       IGNBRK ignore BREAK condition on input
+
+       BRKINT If IGNBRK is not set, generate SIGINT on BREAK con-
+              dition, else read BREAK as character \0.
+
+       IGNPAR ignore framing errors and parity errors.
+
+       PARMRK if  IGNPAR  is  not  set, prefix a character with a
+              parity error or framing error  with  \377  \0.   If
+              neither  IGNPAR nor PARMRK is set, read a character
+              with a parity error or framing error as \0.
+
+       INPCK  enable input parity checking
+
+       ISTRIP strip off eighth bit
+
+       INLCR  translate NL to CR on input
+
+       IGNCR  ignore carriage return on input
+
+       ICRNL  translate  carriage  return  to  newline  on  input
+              (unless IGNCR is set)
+
+       IUCLC  map uppercase characters to lowercase on input
+
+       IXON   enable XON/XOFF flow control on output
+
+       IXANY  enable any character to restart output
+
+       IXOFF  enable XON/XOFF flow control on input
+
+       IMAXBEL
+              ring bell when input queue is full
+
+       c_oflag flag constants:
+
+       OPOST  enable implementation-defined output processing
+
+       OLCUC  map lowercase characters to uppercase on output
+
+       ONLCR  map NL to CR-NL on output
+
+       OCRNL  map CR to NL on output
+
+       ONOCR  don't output CR at column 0
+
+       ONLRET don't output CR
+
+       OFILL  send fill characters for a delay, rather than using
+              a timed delay
+
+       OFDEL  fill  character  is  ASCII  DEL.   If  unset,  fill
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       2
+

+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+              character is ASCII NUL
+
+       NLDLY  newline delay mask.  Values are NL0 and NL1.
+
+       CRDLY  carriage  return  delay mask.  Values are CR0, CR1,
+              CR2, or CR3.
+
+       TABDLY horizontal tab delay mask.  Values are TAB0,  TAB1,
+              TAB2,  TAB3,  or  XTABS.   A value of XTABS expands
+              tabs  to  spaces  (with  tab  stops   every   eight
+              columns).
+
+       BSDLY  backspace delay mask.  Values are BS0 or BS1.
+
+       VTDLY  vertical tab delay mask.  Values are VT0 or VT1.
+
+       FFDLY  form feed delay mask.  Values are FF0 or FF1.
+
+       c_cflag flag constants:
+
+       CSIZE  character  size mask.  Values are CS5, CS6, CS7, or
+              CS8.
+
+       CSTOPB set two stop bits, rather than one.
+
+       CREAD  enable receiver.
+
+       PARENB enable  parity  generation  on  output  and  parity
+              checking for input.
+
+       PARODD parity for input and output is odd.
+
+       HUPCL  lower modem control lines after last process closes
+              the device (hang up).
+
+       CLOCAL ignore modem control lines
+
+       CIBAUD mask for input speeds (not used).
+
+       CRTSCTS
+              flow control.
+
+       c_lflag flag constants:
+
+       ISIG   when any of the characters  INTR,  QUIT,  SUSP,  or
+              DSUSP are received, generate the corresponding sig-
+              nal.
+
+       ICANON enable canonical mode.  This  enables  the  special
+              characters  EOF,  EOL,  EOL2, ERASE, KILL, REPRINT,
+              STATUS, and WERASE, and buffers by lines.
+
+       XCASE  if ICANON is also set, terminal is uppercase  only.
+              Input   is   converted  to  lowercase,  except  for
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       3
+

+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+              characters preceded by  \.   On  output,  uppercase
+              characters  are preceded by \ and lowercase charac-
+              ters are converted to uppercase.
+
+       ECHO   echo input characters.
+
+       ECHOE  if ICANON is also set, the ERASE  character  erases
+              the  preceding  input  character, and WERASE erases
+              the preceding word.
+
+       ECHOK  if ICANON is also set, the  KILL  character  erases
+              the current line.
+
+       ECHONL if  ICANON  is also set, echo the NL character even
+              if ECHO is not set.
+
+       ECHOCTL
+              if ECHO is also set, ASCII  control  signals  other
+              than  TAB,  NL,  START,  and STOP are echoed as ^X,
+              where X is  the  character  with  ASCII  code  0x10
+              greater  than  the  control  signal.   For example,
+              character 0x28 (BS) is echoed as ^H.
+
+       ECHOPRT
+              if ICANON and IECHO are also  set,  characters  are
+              printed as they are being erased.
+
+       ECHOKE if  ICANON  is  also set, KILL is echoed by erasing
+              each character on the line, as specified  by  ECHOE
+              and ECHOPRT.
+
+       FLUSHO output  is  being flushed.  This flag is toggled by
+              typing the DISCARD character.
+
+       NOFLSH disable flushing the input and output  queues  when
+              generating  the  SIGINT  and  SIGQUIT  signals, and
+              flushing the input queue when generating  the  SIG-
+              SUSP signal.
+
+       TOSTOP send  the  SIGTTOU signal to the process group of a
+              background process which tries to write to its con-
+              trolling terminal.
+
+       PENDIN all  characters  in  the  input queue are reprinted
+              when the next character  is  read.   (bash  handles
+              typeahead this way.)
+
+       IEXTEN enable implementation-defined input processing.
+
+       tcgetattr() gets the parameters associated with the object
+       referred by fd and stores them in  the  termios  structure
+       referenced  by  termios_p.   This  function may be invoked
+       from  a  background   process;   however,   the   terminal
+       attributes  may  be  subsequently  changed by a foreground
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       4
+

+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+       process.
+
+       tcsetattr() sets the parameters associated with the termi-
+       nal  (unless support is required from the underlying hard-
+       ware that is not available)  from  the  termios  structure
+       referred to by termios_p.  optional_actions specifies when
+       the changes take effect:
+
+       TCSANOW
+              the change occurs immediately.
+
+       TCSADRAIN
+              the change occurs after all output  written  to  fd
+              has been transmitted.  This function should be used
+              when changing parameters that affect output.
+
+       TCSAFLUSH
+              the change occurs after all output written  to  the
+              object referred by fd has been transmitted, and all
+              input that has been received but not read  will  be
+              discarded before the change is made.
+
+       tcsendbreak() transmits a continuous stream of zero-valued
+       bits for a specific duration, if  the  terminal  is  using
+       asynchronous  serial  data  transmission.   If duration is
+       zero, it transmits zero-valued bits for at least 0.25 sec-
+       onds,  and  not more that 0.5 seconds.  If duration is not
+       zero, it sends zero-valued bits  for  duration*N  seconds,
+       where N is at least 0.25, and not more than 0.5.
+
+       If  the  terminal  is  not  using asynchronous serial data
+       transmission, tcsendbreak()  returns  without  taking  any
+       action.
+
+       tcdrain()  waits  until  all  output written to the object
+       referred to by fd has been transmitted.
+
+       tcflush() discards data written to the object referred  to
+       by  fd but not transmitted, or data received but not read,
+       depending on the value of queue_selector:
+
+       TCIFLUSH
+              flushes data received but not read.
+
+       TCOFLUSH
+              flushes data written but not transmitted.
+
+       TCIOFLUSH
+              flushes both data received but not read,  and  data
+              written but not transmitted.
+
+       tcflow() suspends transmission or reception of data on the
+       object referred to  by  fd,  depending  on  the  value  of
+       action:
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       5
+

+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+       TCOOFF suspends output.
+
+       TCOON  restarts suspended output.
+
+       TCIOFF transmits  a STOP character, which stops the termi-
+              nal device from transmitting data to the system.
+
+       TCION  transmits a START character, which starts the  ter-
+              minal device transmitting data to the system.
+
+       The default on open of a terminal file is that neither its
+       input nor its output is suspended.
+
+       The baud rate functions are provided for getting and  set-
+       ting  the values of the input and output baud rates in the
+       termios structure.  The new  values  do  not  take  effect
+       until tcsetattr() is successfully called.
+
+       Setting  the speed to B0 instructs the modem to "hang up".
+       The actual bit rate corresponding to B38400 may be altered
+       with setserial(8).
+
+       The  input and output baud rates are stored in the termios
+       structure.
+
+       cfgetospeed() returns the output baud rate stored  in  the
+       termios structure pointed to by termios_p.
+
+       cfsetospeed()  sets  the  output  baud  rate stored in the
+       termios structure pointed to by termios_p to speed,  which
+       must be one of these constants:
+            B0
+            B50
+            B75
+            B110
+            B134
+            B150
+            B200
+            B300
+            B600
+            B1200
+            B1800
+            B2400
+            B4800
+            B9600
+            B19200
+            B38400
+            B57600
+            B115200
+            B230400
+       The  zero  baud rate, B0, is used to terminate the connec-
+       tion.  If B0 is specified, the modem control  lines  shall
+       no longer be asserted.  Normally, this will disconnect the
+       line.  CBAUDEX is a  mask  for  the  speeds  beyond  those
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       6
+

+
+
+
+
+
TERMIOS(2)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TERMIOS(2)
+

+
+       defined  in  POSIX.1  (57600  and  above).  Thus, B57600 &
+       CBAUDEX is nonzero.
+
+       cfgetispeed() returns the input baud rate  stored  in  the
+       termios structure.
+
+       cfsetispeed()  sets  the  input  baud  rate  stored in the
+       termios structure to speed.  If the input baud rate is set
+       to  zero,  the input baud rate will be equal to the output
+       baud rate.
+
+       tcgetpgrp() returns process group ID  of  foreground  pro-
+       cessing group, or -1 on error.
+
+       tcsetpgrp()  sets process group ID to pgrpid.  pgrpid must
+       be the ID of a process group in the same session.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       cfgetispeed() returns the input baud rate  stored  in  the
+       termios structure.
+
+       cfgetospeed()  returns  the output baud rate stored in the
+       termios structure.
+
+       tcgetpgrp() returns process group ID  of  foreground  pro-
+       cessing group, or -1 on error.
+
+       All other functions return:
+
+       0      on success.
+
+       -1     on failure and set errno to indicate the error.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                   February 25, 1995                       7
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/toupper.htm b/reference/C/MAN/toupper.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..346390a --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/toupper.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +toupper + +
+
+
+
+
+
TOUPPER(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TOUPPER(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       toupper, tolower - convert letter to upper or lower case
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <ctype.h>
+
+       int toupper (int c);
+       int tolower (int c);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       toupper()  converts  the letter c to upper case, if possi-
+       ble.
+
+       tolower() converts the letter c to lower case,  if  possi-
+       ble.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  value  returned is that of the converted letter, or c
+       if the conversion was not possible.
+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C, BSD 4.3
+
+
BUGS
+
       The details of what constitutes an uppercase or  lowercase
+       letter  depend  on  the  current locale.  For example, the
+       default "C" locale does not know about umlauts, so no con-
+       version is done for them.
+
+       In some non - English locales, there are lowercase letters
+       with no corresponding  uppercase  equivalent;  the  German
+       sharp s is one example.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+isalpha, +setlocale, +locale, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ttyname.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ttyname.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58615dc --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ttyname.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +ttyname + +
+
+
+
+
+
TTYNAME(3)          Linux Programmer's Manual          TTYNAME(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       ttyname - return name of a terminal
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       char *ttyname ( int desc );
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       Returns  a  pointer to the pathname of the terminal device
+       that is open on the file descriptor desc, or NULL on error
+       (for example, if desc is not connected to a terminal).
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       POSIX.1
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+isatty, +fstat, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                     April 20, 1995                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/uname.htm b/reference/C/MAN/uname.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42d6a30 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/uname.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +uname + +
+
+
+
+
+
UNAME(2)            Linux Programmer's Manual            UNAME(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       uname - get name and information about current kernel
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <sys/utsname.h>
+
+       int uname(struct utsname *buf);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       uname  returns  system  information  in  buf.  The utsname
+       struct is as defined in /usr/include/sys/utsname.h :
+       struct utsname {
+                      char sysname[65];
+                      char nodename[65];
+                      char release[65];
+                      char version[65];
+                      char machine[65];
+                      char domainname[65];
+                      };
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EFAULT  buf is not valid.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+uname, +getdomainname, +gethostname, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux 0.99.11               24 July 93                          1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/ungetc.htm b/reference/C/MAN/ungetc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54a79a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/ungetc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +ungetc + +
+
+
+
+
+
GETS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             GETS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       fgetc, fgets, getc, getchar, gets, ungetc - input of char-
+       acters and strings
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int fgetc(FILE *stream);
+       char *fgets(char *s, int size, FILE *stream);
+       int getc(FILE *stream);
+       int getchar(void);
+       char *gets(char *s);
+       int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       fgetc() reads the next character from stream  and  returns
+       it  as  an  unsigned char cast to an int, or EOF on end of
+       file or error.
+
+       getc() is equivalent to fgetc()  except  that  it  may  be
+       implemented  as  a  macro which evaluates stream more than
+       once.
+
+       getchar() is equivalent to getc(stdin).
+
+       gets() reads a line from stdin into the buffer pointed  to
+       by  s  until either a terminating newline or EOF, which it
+       replaces with '\0'.  No check for buffer overrun  is  per-
+       formed (see BUGS below).
+
+       fgets()  reads  in at most one less than n characters from
+       stream and stores them into the buffer pointed  to  by  s.
+       Reading  stops after an EOF or a newline.  If a newline is
+       read, it is stored into the  buffer.   A  '\0'  is  stored
+       after the last character in the buffer.
+
+       ungetc()  pushes  c back to stream, cast to unsigned char,
+       where it is  available  for  subsequent  read  operations.
+       Pushed  -  back  characters  will  be  returned in reverse
+       order; only one pushback is guaranteed.
+
+       Calls to the functions described here can  be  mixed  with
+       each  other  and  with calls to other input functions from
+       the stdio library for the same input stream.
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
       fgetc(), getc() and getchar() return the character read as
+       an  unsigned  char cast to an int or EOF on end of file or
+       error.
+
+       gets() and fgets() return s on success, and NULL on end of
+       file or error.
+
+       ungetc() returns c on success, or EOF on error.
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
GETS(3)             Linux Programmer's Manual             GETS(3)
+

+
+
CONFORMS TO
+
       ANSI - C, POSIX.1
+
+
BUGS
+
       Because  it is impossible to tell without knowing the data
+       in advance how  many  characters  gets()  will  read,  and
+       because  gets() will continue to store characters past the
+       end of the buffer, it is extremely dangerous to  use.   It
+       has  been  used  to  break computer security.  Use fgets()
+       instead.
+
+       It is not advisable to mix calls to input  functions  from
+       the stdio library with low - level calls to read() for the
+       file descriptor associated  with  the  input  stream;  the
+       results  will  be undefined and very probably not what you
+       want.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+read, +write, +fopen, +fread, +scanf, +puts, +fseek, +ferror, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       April 4, 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/unlink.htm b/reference/C/MAN/unlink.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..79ab69d --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/unlink.htm @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +unlink + +
+
+
+
+
+
UNLINK(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           UNLINK(2)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       unlink - delete a name and possibly the file it refers to
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <unistd.h>
+
+       int unlink(const char *pathname);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       unlink  deletes  a  name from the filesystem. If that name
+       was the last link to a file and no processes have the file
+       open  the  file  is  deleted and the space it was using is
+       made available for reuse.
+
+       If the name was the last link to a file but any  processes
+       still have the file open the file will remain in existence
+       until the last file descriptor referring to it is  closed.
+
+       If  the  name  referred  to  a  symbolic  link the link is
+       removed.
+
+       If the name referred to a socket, fifo or device the  name
+       for it is removed but processes which have the object open
+       may continue to use it.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       On success, zero is returned.  On error, -1  is  returned,
+       and errno is set appropriately.
+
+
ERRORS
+
       EFAULT  pathname  points  outside  your accessible address
+               space.
+
+       EACCES  Write access to the directory containing  pathname
+               is not allowed for the process's effective uid, or
+               one of the directories in pathname did  not  allow
+               search (execute) permission.
+
+       EPERM   The  directory containing pathname has the sticky-
+               bit (S_ISVTX) set and the process's effective  uid
+               is  neither  the uid of the file to be deleted nor
+               that of the directory containing it.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+               pathname was too long.
+
+       ENOENT  A directory component in pathname does  not  exist
+               or is a dangling symbolic link.
+
+       ENOTDIR A  component  used  as  a directory in pathname is
+               not, in fact, a directory.
+
+       EISDIR  pathname refers to a directory.
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                      24 July 1993                         1
+

+
+
+
+
+
UNLINK(2)           Linux Programmer's Manual           UNLINK(2)
+

+
+       ENOMEM  Insufficient kernel memory was available.
+
+       EROFS   pathname refers to a file on a read-only  filesys-
+               tem.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
+
+
BUGS
+
       Infelicities  in the protocol underlying NFS can cause the
+       unexpected disappearance of files which  are  still  being
+       used.
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+link, +rename, +open, +rmdir, +mknod, +remove, +rm, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Linux                      24 July 1993                         2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/unsetenv.htm b/reference/C/MAN/unsetenv.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd95b1b --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/unsetenv.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +unsetenv + +
+
+
+
+
+
SETENV(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           SETENV(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       setenv - change or add an environment variable
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int setenv(const char *name, const char *value, int overwrite);
+
+       void unsetenv(const char *name);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  setenv() function adds the variable name to the envi-
+       ronment with the value value, if  name  does  not  already
+       exist.   If  name  does exist in the environment, then its
+       value is changed to value if  overwrite  is  non-zero;  if
+       overwrite  is zero, then the value of name is not changed.
+
+       The unsetenv() function deletes the variable name from the
+       environment.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       The  setenv()  function  returns zero on success, or -1 if
+       there was insufficient space in the environment.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       BSD 4.3
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+getenv, +putenv, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD                       April 4, 1993                         1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/va_start.htm b/reference/C/MAN/va_start.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a35845f --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/va_start.htm @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +va_start + +
+
+
+
+
+
STDARG(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STDARG(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       stdarg - variable argument lists
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdarg.h>
+
+       void va_start( va_list ap, last);
+       typeva_arg( va_list ap, type);
+       void va_end( va_list ap);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       A  function  may  be called with a varying number of argu-
+       ments  of  varying  types.   The  include  file   stdarg.h
+       declares a type va_list and defines three macros for step-
+       ping through a list of arguments whose  number  and  types
+       are not known to the called function.
+
+       The called function must declare an object of type va_list
+       which is used by the macros va_start, va_arg, and  va_end.
+
+       The  va_start  macro  initializes ap for subsequent use by
+       va_arg and va_end, and must be called first.
+
+       The parameter last is  the  name  of  the  last  parameter
+       before  the variable argument list, i.e., the last parame-
+       ter of which the calling function knows the type.
+
+       Because the address of  this  parameter  is  used  in  the
+       va_start  macro,  it  should not be declared as a register
+       variable, or as a function or an array type.
+
+       The va_start macro returns no value.
+
+       The va_arg macro expands to an  expression  that  has  the
+       type  and  value  of  the  next argument in the call.  The
+       parameter ap is the va_list ap  initialized  by  va_start.
+       Each  call  to  va_arg  modifies  ap so that the next call
+       returns the next argument.  The parameter type is  a  type
+       name  specified so that the type of a pointer to an object
+       that has the specified type  can  be  obtained  simply  by
+       adding a * to type.
+
+       If there is no next argument, or if type is not compatible
+       with the type of the actual  next  argument  (as  promoted
+       according  to  the  default  argument  promotions), random
+       errors will occur.
+
+       The first use of  the  va_arg  macro  after  that  of  the
+       va_start  macro  returns the argument after last.  Succes-
+       sive invocations return the values of the remaining  argu-
+       ments.
+
+       The va_end macro handles a normal return from the function
+       whose variable argument list was initialized by  va_start.
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
STDARG(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           STDARG(3)
+

+
+       The va_end macro returns no value.
+
+
EXAMPLES
+
       The  function  foo takes a string of format characters and
+       prints out the argument associated with each format  char-
+       acter based on the type.
+              void foo(char *fmt, ...)
+              {
+                   va_list ap;
+                   int d;
+                   char c, *p, *s;
+
+                   va_start(ap, fmt);
+                   while (*fmt)
+                        switch(*fmt++) {
+                        case 's':           /* string */
+                             s = va_arg(ap, char *);
+                             printf("string %s\n", s);
+                             break;
+                        case 'd':           /* int */
+                             d = va_arg(ap, int);
+                             printf("int %d\n", d);
+                             break;
+                        case 'c':           /* char */
+                             c = va_arg(ap, char);
+                             printf("char %c\n", c);
+                             break;
+                        }
+                   va_end(ap);
+              }
+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  va_start,  va_arg,  and va_end macros conform to ANSI
+       C3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
+
+
COMPATIBILITY
+
       These macros are not compatible with the  historic  macros
+       they  replace.  A backward compatible version can be found
+       in the include file varargs.h.
+
+
BUGS
+
       Unlike the varargs macros, the stdarg macros do not permit
+       programmers  to  code  a function with no fixed arguments.
+       This problem generates work mainly when converting varargs
+       code  to stdarg code, but it also creates difficulties for
+       variadic functions that wish to pass all  of  their  argu-
+       ments on to a function that takes a va_list argument, such
+       as vfprintf(3).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/vfprintf.htm b/reference/C/MAN/vfprintf.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd43848 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/vfprintf.htm @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ +vfprintf + +
+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       printf,  fprintf,  sprintf,  vprintf, vfprintf, vsprintf -
+       formatted output conversion
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdio.h>
+
+       int printf( const char *format, ...);
+       int fprintf( FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);
+       int sprintf( char *str, const char *format, ...);
+
+       #include <stdarg.h>
+
+       int vprintf( const char *format, va_list ap);
+       int vfprintf( FILE *stream, const  char  *format,  va_list
+       ap);
+       int vsprintf( char *str, char *format, va_list ap);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The  printf  family of functions produces output according
+       to a format as described below.  Printf and vprintf  write
+       output  to stdout, the standard output stream; fprintf and
+       vfprintf write output to the given output stream; sprintf,
+       and  vsprintf  write  to  the character string str.  These
+       functions write the output under the control of  a  format
+       string  that  specifies how subsequent arguments (or argu-
+       ments accessed via the variable-length argument facilities
+       of  stdarg(3)  are  converted for output.  These functions
+       return the number of characters printed (not including the
+       trailing `\0' used to end output to strings).
+
+       The  format string is composed of zero or more directives:
+       ordinary characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to
+       the  output stream; and conversion specifications, each of
+       which results in fetching zero or  more  subsequent  argu-
+       ments.  Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+       character  %.   The  arguments  must  correspond  properly
+       (after  type  promotion)  with  the  conversion specifier.
+       After the %, the following appear in sequence:
+
+       o      Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+              #      specifying that the  value  should  be  con-
+                     verted  to an ``alternate form''.  For c, d,
+                     i, n, p, s, and u conversions,  this  option
+                     has  no effect.  For o conversions, the pre-
+                     cision of the number is increased  to  force
+                     the  first character of the output string to
+                     a zero (except if a zero  value  is  printed
+                     with  an explicit precision of zero).  For x
+                     and X conversions, a non-zero result has the
+                     string  `0x'  (or  `0X'  for  X conversions)
+                     prepended to it.  For e, E, f, g, and G con-
+                     versions,  the  result will always contain a
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       1
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+                     decimal point, even if no digits  follow  it
+                     (normally,  a  decimal  point appears in the
+                     results of those conversions only if a digit
+                     follows).  For g and G conversions, trailing
+                     zeros are not removed  from  the  result  as
+                     they would otherwise be.
+
+              0      specifying  zero  padding.   For all conver-
+                     sions  except  n,  the  converted  value  is
+                     padded  on  the  left with zeros rather than
+                     blanks.  If a  precision  is  given  with  a
+                     numeric  conversion  (d,  i, o, u, i, x, and
+                     X), the 0 flag is ignored.
+
+              -      (a negative field width flag) indicates  the
+                     converted  value  is  to be left adjusted on
+                     the field boundary.  Except  for  n  conver-
+                     sions,  the converted value is padded on the
+                     right with blanks, rather than on  the  left
+                     with  blanks or zeros.  A - overrides a 0 if
+                     both are given.
+
+                     (a space) specifying that a blank should  be
+                     left  before a positive number produced by a
+                     signed conversion (d, e, E, f, g, G, or  i).
+
+              +      specifying  that  a  sign  always  be placed
+                     before a number produced by a signed conver-
+                     sion.   A  +  overrides  a space if both are
+                     used.
+
+       o      An optional decimal digit string specifying a mini-
+              mum  field width.  If the converted value has fewer
+              characters than the field width, it will be  padded
+              with  spaces  on  the  left (or right, if the left-
+              adjustment flag has been given)  to  fill  out  the
+              field width.
+
+       o      An  optional  precision,  in  the  form of a period
+              (`.')  followed by an optional  digit  string.   If
+              the digit string is omitted, the precision is taken
+              as zero.  This gives the minimum number  of  digits
+              to appear for d, i, o, u, x, and X conversions, the
+              number of digits to appear after the  decimal-point
+              for  e, E, and f conversions, the maximum number of
+              significant digits for g and G conversions, or  the
+              maximum  number  of characters to be printed from a
+              string for s conversions.
+
+       o      The optional character h, specifying that a follow-
+              ing d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion corresponds to a
+              short int or unsigned short int argument, or that a
+              following  n conversion corresponds to a pointer to
+              a short int argument.
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       2
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+       o      The optional character l (ell)  specifying  that  a
+              following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion applies to
+              a pointer to a long int or unsigned long int  argu-
+              ment,  or that a following n conversion corresponds
+              to a pointer to a long int argument.
+
+       o      The character L specifying that a following  e,  E,
+              f,  g, or G conversion corresponds to a long double
+              argument.
+
+       o      A character that specifies the type  of  conversion
+              to be applied.
+
+       A  field  width or precision, or both, may be indicated by
+       an asterisk `*' instead of a digit string.  In this  case,
+       an  int argument supplies the field width or precision.  A
+       negative field width is treated as a left adjustment  flag
+       followed  by  a positive field width; a negative precision
+       is treated as though it were missing.
+
+       The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+       diouxX The int (or appropriate variant) argument  is  con-
+              verted  to signed decimal (d and i), unsigned octal
+              (o, unsigned decimal (u, or unsigned hexadecimal (x
+              and X) notation.  The letters abcdef are used for x
+              conversions; the letters ABCDEF are used for X con-
+              versions.  The precision, if any, gives the minimum
+              number of digits that must appear; if the converted
+              value  requires  fewer  digits, it is padded on the
+              left with zeros.
+
+       DOU    The long int argument is converted to signed  deci-
+              mal, unsigned octal, or unsigned decimal, as if the
+              format had been ld, lo, or lu respectively.   These
+              conversion  characters  are  deprecated,  and  will
+              eventually disappear.
+
+       eE     The double argument is rounded and converted in the
+              style  [-]d.dddedd  where there is one digit before
+              the decimal-point character and the number of  dig-
+              its after it is equal to the precision; if the pre-
+              cision is missing, it is taken as 6; if the  preci-
+              sion  is  zero, no decimal-point character appears.
+              An E conversion uses the letter E (rather  than  e)
+              to  introduce  the  exponent.   The exponent always
+              contains at least two digits; if the value is zero,
+              the exponent is 00.
+
+       f      The  double  argument  is  rounded and converted to
+              decimal notation in the style [-]ddd.ddd, where the
+              number  of digits after the decimal-point character
+              is equal to the precision  specification.   If  the
+              precision  is  missing,  it  is  taken as 6; if the
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       3
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+              precision  is  explicitly  zero,  no  decimal-point
+              character  appears.  If a decimal point appears, at
+              least one digit appears before it.
+
+       g      The double argument is converted in style  f  or  e
+              (or  E for G conversions).  The precision specifies
+              the number of significant digits.  If the precision
+              is missing, 6 digits are given; if the precision is
+              zero, it is treated as 1.  Style e is used  if  the
+              exponent  from  its  conversion  is less than -4 or
+              greater than or equal to the  precision.   Trailing
+              zeros  are  removed from the fractional part of the
+              result; a decimal point appears only if it is  fol-
+              lowed by at least one digit.
+
+       c      The  int argument is converted to an unsigned char,
+              and the resulting character is written.
+
+       s      The ``char *'' argument is expected to be a pointer
+              to  an  array  of  character  type  (pointer  to  a
+              string).  Characters from the array are written  up
+              to (but not including) a terminating NUL character;
+              if a precision is specified, no more than the  num-
+              ber  specified  are  written.   If  a  precision is
+              given, no null character need be  present;  if  the
+              precision  is not specified, or is greater than the
+              size of the array, the array must contain a  termi-
+              nating NUL character.
+
+       p      The  ``void *'' pointer argument is printed in hex-
+              adecimal (as if by %#x or %#lx).
+
+       n      The number of characters written so far  is  stored
+              into  the  integer  indicated  by the ``int *'' (or
+              variant) pointer argument.   No  argument  is  con-
+              verted.
+
+       %      A  `%'  is  written.  No argument is converted. The
+              complete conversion specification is `%%'.
+
+       In no case does a non-existent or small field width  cause
+       truncation  of  a  field; if the result of a conversion is
+       wider than the field width, the field is expanded to  con-
+       tain the conversion result.
+
+
+
EXAMPLES
+
       To  print  a  date  and  time in the form `Sunday, July 3,
+       10:02', where weekday and month are pointers to strings:
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              fprintf(stdout, "%s, %s %d, %.2d:%.2d\n",
+                   weekday, month, day, hour, min);
+
+       To print to five decimal places:
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       4
+

+
+
+
+
+
PRINTF(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           PRINTF(3)
+

+
+              #include <math.h>
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              fprintf(stdout, "pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
+
+       To allocate a 128 byte string and print into it:
+              #include <stdio.h>
+              #include <stdlib.h>
+              #include <stdarg.h>
+              char *newfmt(const char *fmt, ...)
+              {
+                        char *p;
+                        va_list ap;
+                        if ((p = malloc(128)) == NULL)
+                             return (NULL);
+                        va_start(ap, fmt);
+                        (void) vsnprintf(p, 128, fmt, ap);
+                        va_end(ap);
+                        return (p);
+              }
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+printf, +scanf, +

+
+
STANDARDS
+
       The  fprintf,  printf,  sprintf,  vprintf,  vfprintf,  and
+       vsprintf  functions  conform  to  ANSI C3.159-1989 (``ANSI
+       C'').
+
+
BUGS
+
       Some floating point conversions under Linux  cause  memory
+       leaks.
+
+       The conversion formats %D, %O, and %U are not standard and
+       are provided only for backward compatibility.   These  may
+       not be provided under Linux.
+
+       The  effect of padding the %p format with zeros (either by
+       the 0 flag or by specifying a precision), and  the  benign
+       effect  (i.e.,  none)  of  the # flag on %n and %p conver-
+       sions, as well as other nonsensical combinations  such  as
+       %Ld,   are  not  standard;  such  combinations  should  be
+       avoided.
+
+       Because sprintf and vsprintf  assume  an  infinitely  long
+       string, callers must be careful not to overflow the actual
+       space; this is often impossible to assure.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
BSD MANPAGE              29 November 1993                       5
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/wcstombs.htm b/reference/C/MAN/wcstombs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..808d7aa --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/wcstombs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +wcstombs + +
+
+
+
+
+
WCSTOMBS(3)         Linux Programmer's Manual         WCSTOMBS(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       wcstombs  - convert a wide character string to a multibyte
+       character string.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       size_t wcstombs(char *s, const wchar_t *pwcs, size_t n);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The wcstombs() function converts a sequence of wide  char-
+       acters  from  the  array pwcs into a sequence of multibyte
+       characters and stores up to n bytes of  multibyte  charac-
+       ters in the array s.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       wcstombs()  returns  the number of bytes stored in s or -1
+       if s contains an invalid wide character.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mblen, +mbtowc, +mbstowcs, +wctomb, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 29, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 diff --git a/reference/C/MAN/wctomb.htm b/reference/C/MAN/wctomb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3574ac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/reference/C/MAN/wctomb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +wctomb + +
+
+
+
+
+
WCTOMB(3)           Linux Programmer's Manual           WCTOMB(3)
+

+
+
NAME
+
       wctomb  -  convert a wide character to a multibyte charac-
+       ter.
+
+
SYNOPSIS
+
       #include <stdlib.h>
+
+       int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wchar);
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
       The wctomb() function converts a wide character wchar into
+       a  multibyte  character  and, if s is not NULL, stores the
+       multibyte character representation in s.
+
+
RETURN VALUE
+
       wctomb() returns the number  of  bytes  in  the  multibyte
+       character or -1 if the wide character is not valid.
+
+
CONFORMING TO
+
       SVID 3, ISO 9899
+
+
+
+

SEE ALSO +

+mblen, +mbstowcs, +mbtowc, +wcstombs, +

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GNU                       March 29, 1993                        1
+

+
+
+

+

+

+

+ + + + +
+Top + +Master Index + +Keywords + +Functions +
+
+

+

+ +This manual page was brought to you by mjl_man V-2.0 -- cgit v1.2.3-54-g00ecf